aboutsummaryrefslogtreecommitdiffstats
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
-rw-r--r--docs/installer/zh_CN.po3988
-rw-r--r--docs/installer/zh_CN/DrakLive-cover.xml74
-rw-r--r--docs/installer/zh_CN/DrakLive.xml63
-rw-r--r--docs/installer/zh_CN/DrakX-cover.xml144
-rw-r--r--docs/installer/zh_CN/DrakX.xml133
-rw-r--r--docs/installer/zh_CN/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml460
-rw-r--r--docs/installer/zh_CN/acceptLicense.xml75
-rw-r--r--docs/installer/zh_CN/addUser.xml145
-rw-r--r--docs/installer/zh_CN/add_supplemental_media.xml52
-rw-r--r--docs/installer/zh_CN/ask_mntpoint_s.xml87
-rw-r--r--docs/installer/zh_CN/bestTime.xml20
-rw-r--r--docs/installer/zh_CN/bootLive.xml135
-rw-r--r--docs/installer/zh_CN/chooseDesktop.xml33
-rw-r--r--docs/installer/zh_CN/choosePackageGroups.xml40
-rw-r--r--docs/installer/zh_CN/choosePackagesTree.xml23
-rw-r--r--docs/installer/zh_CN/configureServices.xml40
-rw-r--r--docs/installer/zh_CN/configureTimezoneUTC.xml29
-rw-r--r--docs/installer/zh_CN/configureX_card_list.xml59
-rw-r--r--docs/installer/zh_CN/configureX_chooser.xml64
-rw-r--r--docs/installer/zh_CN/configureX_monitor.xml83
-rw-r--r--docs/installer/zh_CN/diskdrake.xml67
-rw-r--r--docs/installer/zh_CN/doPartitionDisks.xml141
-rw-r--r--docs/installer/zh_CN/exitInstall.xml38
-rw-r--r--docs/installer/zh_CN/formatPartitions.xml46
-rw-r--r--docs/installer/zh_CN/installUpdates.xml31
-rw-r--r--docs/installer/zh_CN/installer.xml270
-rw-r--r--docs/installer/zh_CN/login.xml24
-rw-r--r--docs/installer/zh_CN/media_selection.xml46
-rw-r--r--docs/installer/zh_CN/minimal-install.xml48
-rw-r--r--docs/installer/zh_CN/misc-params.xml210
-rw-r--r--docs/installer/zh_CN/reboot.xml20
-rw-r--r--docs/installer/zh_CN/resizeFATChoose.xml33
-rw-r--r--docs/installer/zh_CN/securityLevel.xml32
-rw-r--r--docs/installer/zh_CN/selectCountry.xml63
-rw-r--r--docs/installer/zh_CN/selectInstallClass.xml74
-rw-r--r--docs/installer/zh_CN/selectKeyboard.xml56
-rw-r--r--docs/installer/zh_CN/selectKeyboardLive.xml14
-rw-r--r--docs/installer/zh_CN/selectLanguage.xml63
-rw-r--r--docs/installer/zh_CN/selectMouse.xml31
-rw-r--r--docs/installer/zh_CN/setupBootloader.xml114
-rw-r--r--docs/installer/zh_CN/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml64
-rw-r--r--docs/installer/zh_CN/setupSCSI.xml45
-rw-r--r--docs/installer/zh_CN/soundConfig.xml52
-rw-r--r--docs/installer/zh_CN/takeOverHdConfirm.xml33
-rw-r--r--docs/installer/zh_CN/testing.xml80
-rw-r--r--docs/installer/zh_CN/uninstall-Mageia.xml37
-rw-r--r--docs/installer/zh_CN/unused.xml27
47 files changed, 7506 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/docs/installer/zh_CN.po b/docs/installer/zh_CN.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..9e7f27a2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/zh_CN.po
@@ -0,0 +1,3988 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE
+# Copyright (C) YEAR Mageia
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Mageia Installer Help package.
+#
+# Translators:
+# 吴善俊 <sjwuny@126.com>, 2013
+# xiao wenming <xwm-citcc5@hotmail.com>, 2015
+# zwpwjwtz <zwpwjwtz@126.com>, 2016
+# 吴善俊 <sjwuny@126.com>, 2013
+# 周潇波 <zhouxiaobo.500@gmail.com>, 2014
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Mageia\n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: doc-discuss@ml.mageia.org\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2016-02-10 16:29+0200\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: 2016-03-05 13:27+0000\n"
+"Last-Translator: zwpwjwtz <zwpwjwtz@126.com>\n"
+"Language-Team: Chinese (China) (http://www.transifex.com/MageiaLinux/mageia/"
+"language/zh_CN/)\n"
+"Language: zh_CN\n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Plural-Forms: nplurals=1; plural=0;\n"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:25
+msgid "License and Release Notes"
+msgstr "许可证和发行说明"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:29
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata xml:id=\"acceptLicense-"
+"im1\" revision=\"4\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-license."
+"png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"acceptLicense-im2\" "
+"revision=\"5\" align=\"center\" condition=\"live\" format=\"PNG\" fileref="
+"\"live-license.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata xml:id=\"acceptLicense-"
+"im1\" revision=\"4\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-license."
+"png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"acceptLicense-im2\" "
+"revision=\"5\" align=\"center\" condition=\"live\" format=\"PNG\" fileref="
+"\"live-license.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:40
+msgid "License Agreement"
+msgstr "许可协议"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:43
+msgid ""
+"Before installing <application>Mageia</application>, please read the license "
+"terms and conditions carefully."
+msgstr ""
+"在安装 <application>Mageia</application> 之前,请先仔细阅读许可条款和许可条"
+"件。"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:46
+msgid ""
+"These terms and conditions apply to the entire <application>Mageia</"
+"application> distribution and must be accepted before you can continue."
+msgstr ""
+"这些许可条款和许可条件适用于整个 <application>Mageia</application> 发行版,你"
+"必须予以接受才能继续安装。"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:50
+msgid ""
+"To accept, simply select <guilabel>Accept</guilabel> and then click on "
+"<guibutton>Next</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+"要接受, 只要选择 <guilabel>接受</guilabel> 后点击 <guibutton>下一步</"
+"guibutton>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:53
+msgid ""
+"If you decide not to accept these conditions, then we thank you for looking. "
+"Clicking <guibutton>Quit</guibutton> will reboot your computer."
+msgstr ""
+"若你不希望接受这些条件,我们向您表示诚挚歉意。请点击 <guibutton>退出</"
+"guibutton> 来重启计算机。"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:63
+msgid "Release Notes"
+msgstr "发行说明"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/acceptLicense.xml:70
+msgid ""
+"Important information are given about this release of <application>Mageia</"
+"application> and are accessible clicking on the <guibutton>Release Notes</"
+"guibutton> button."
+msgstr ""
+"有关此 Mageia 发布版本的重要信息,可以通过点击 <guibutton>发行说明</"
+"guibutton> 来阅读。"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'xml:lang' of: <section>
+#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:2 en/DrakLive-cover.xml:2 en/DrakLive.xml:1
+#: en/DrakX-cover.xml:2 en/DrakX.xml:1 en/media_selection.xml:1
+msgid "en"
+msgstr "zh_CN"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:10
+msgid "Media Selection (Configure Supplemental Installation Media)"
+msgstr "介质选择 (设置增补的安装介质)"
+
+#. papoteur 2013-04-13 - created
+#. marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot and expanded title (because is was the same as for media_selection
+#. marja 2013-04-16 s/a optical/an optcal/ s/support/disc/ s/or or/or/ s/at/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:18
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-"
+"add_supplemental_media.png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"dx2-"
+"add_supplemental_media-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-"
+"add_supplemental_media.png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"dx2-"
+"add_supplemental_media-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"This screen gives you the list of already recognized repositories. You can "
+"add other sources for packages, like an optical disc or a remote source. The "
+"source selection determines which packages will be available for selection "
+"during the next steps."
+msgstr ""
+"此窗口中列出了已识别的软件仓库。你可以添加其他的软件源,如光盘或远程资源。所"
+"选的源将决定下一步中哪些软件包可用于安装。"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:29
+msgid "For a network source, there are two steps to follow:"
+msgstr "如果需要获取网络资源,请执行以下两步:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:33
+msgid "Choosing and activation of the network, if not already up."
+msgstr "若尚未启用网络链接,请选择并启用它。"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:37
+msgid ""
+"Selecting a mirror or specifying a URL (very first entry). By selecting a "
+"mirror, you have access to the selection of all repositories managed by "
+"Mageia, like the Nonfree , the Tainted repositories and the Updates. With "
+"the URL, you can designate a specific repository or your own NFS "
+"installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:46
+msgid ""
+"If you are updating a 64 bit installation which may contain some 32 bit "
+"packages, it is advised to use this screen to add an online mirror by "
+"ticking one of the Network protocols here. The 64 bit DVD iso only contains "
+"64 bit and noarch packages, it will not be able to update the 32 bit "
+"packages. However, after adding an online mirror, installer will find the "
+"needed 32 bit packages there."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/addUser.xml:3
+msgid "User and Superuser Management"
+msgstr "用户和管理员管理"
+
+#. Started by marja,using Led43's text, on 2012 03 27
+#. NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED!
+#. SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back
+#. removed para xml:id's, finished the page using Led43's text in the wiki, but
+#. changed his text about the Advanced User Managment screen (the only thing
+#. about guest account there, is the box you can tick or untick to enable or
+#. disable it, the rest is about the normal user you're adding in the previous
+#. screen), marja, 20120409
+#. barjac 2012-04-13 moved explanation of xguest lower down. I don't understand
+#. "rbash" in the xguest warning - is that correct?
+#. JohnR 2012-04-19 Language proofreading
+#. marja 2012-04-24 Added screenshot
+#. marja 2013-04-26 added new note
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/addUser.xml:28
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align="
+"\"center\" xml:id=\"setRootPassword-im1\" fileref=\"dx2-setRootPassword.png"
+"\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" "
+"fileref=\"live-user1.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align="
+"\"center\" xml:id=\"setRootPassword-im1\" fileref=\"dx2-setRootPassword.png"
+"\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" "
+"fileref=\"live-user1.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/addUser.xml:39
+msgid "Set Administrator (root) Password:"
+msgstr "设置管理员(root账户)密码:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:43
+msgid ""
+"It is advisable for all <application>Mageia</application> installations to "
+"set a superuser or administrator's password, usually called the "
+"<emphasis>root password</emphasis> in Linux. As you type a password into the "
+"top box the colour of its shield will change from red to yellow to green "
+"depending on the strength of the password. A green shield shows you are "
+"using a strong password. You need to repeat the same password in the box "
+"just below the first password box, this checks that you have not mistyped "
+"the first password by comparing them."
+msgstr ""
+"我们建议任何时候安装 <application>Mageia</application> 都设置一个超级用户或管"
+"理员密码(Linux 中一般叫做 root 密码)。当你在顶部输入框中输入密码时,盾的颜"
+"色将会从红色变为黄色、绿色,用以指示你所输入密码的强度。绿色表示你的密码强度"
+"较高。你需要在下方输入框中在此输入相同的密码,以确保你之前的密码没有输错。"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:53
+msgid ""
+"All passwords are case sensitive, it is best to use a mixture of letters "
+"(upper and lower case), numbers and other characters in a password."
+msgstr ""
+"所有的密码都区分大小写。建议子啊密码中混合使用字母(大写和小写)、数字和其他"
+"字符。"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/addUser.xml:61
+msgid "Enter a user"
+msgstr "输入用户名"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:64
+msgid ""
+"Add a user here. A user has fewer rights than the superuser (root), but "
+"enough to surf the internet, use office applications or play games and "
+"anything else the average user does with his computer"
+msgstr ""
+"在这里添加一个用户。一个用户拥有比超级管理员更少的权限,但是网上冲浪,使用办"
+"公软件或者玩游戏等是足够的。"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:70
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Icon</guibutton>: if you click on this button it will change the "
+"users icon."
+msgstr "<guibutton>图标</guibutton>:若点击此按钮,则会改变用户图标。"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:75
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Real Name</guilabel>: Insert the users real name into this text "
+"box."
+msgstr "<guilabel>真实姓名</guilabel>:在文本框中输入用户的真名。"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:80
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Login Name</guilabel>: Here you enter the user login name or let "
+"drakx use a version of the users real name. <emphasis>The login name is case "
+"sensitive.</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+"<guilabel>登录名</guilabel>:输入用户的登录名,或让 drakx 根据真实姓名自动设"
+"置。<emphasis>登录名区分大小写。</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:86
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Password</guilabel>: In this text box you should type in the user "
+"password. There is a shield at the end of the text box that indicates the "
+"strength of the password. (See also <xref linkend=\"givePassword\"/>)"
+msgstr ""
+"<guilabel>密码</guilabel>:在此文本框中输入用户密码。后面的盾牌图标将会指示密"
+"码强度。(参见 <xref linkend=\"givePassword\"/>)"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:92
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Password (again)</guilabel>: Retype the user password into this "
+"text box and drakx will check you have the same password in each of the user "
+"password text boxes."
+msgstr ""
+"<guilabel>密码(重复)</guilabel>:再输入依次用户密码。drakx 将会检查两次输入"
+"的密码是否一致。"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:99
+msgid ""
+"Any user you add while installing Mageia, will have a world readable (but "
+"write protected) home directory."
+msgstr "任何在安装 Mageia 时添加的用户将拥有一个全局可读(但写保护)的主目录。"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:102
+msgid ""
+"However, while using your new install, any user you add in <emphasis>MCC - "
+"System - Manage users on system</emphasis> will have a home directory that "
+"is both read and write protected."
+msgstr ""
+"不过,在使用系统时,通过 <emphasis>Mageia 控制中心 - 系统 -管理系统用户</"
+"emphasis>添加的用户将拥有其他用户不可读且不可写的主目录。"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:106
+msgid ""
+"If you don't want a world readable home directory for anyone, it is advised "
+"to only add a temporary user now and to add the real one(s) after reboot."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:110
+msgid ""
+"If you prefer world readable home directories, you might want to add all "
+"extra needed users in the <emphasis>Configuration - Summary</emphasis> step "
+"during the install. Choose <emphasis>User management</emphasis>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:115
+msgid "The access permissions can also be changed after the install."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/addUser.xml:122
+msgid "Advanced User Management"
+msgstr "高级用户管理"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:125
+msgid ""
+"If the <guibutton>advanced</guibutton> button is clicked you are offered a "
+"screen that allows you to edit the settings for the user you are adding."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:129
+msgid "Additionally, you can disable or enable a guest account."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><warning><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:133
+msgid ""
+"Anything a guest with a default <emphasis>rbash</emphasis> guest account "
+"saves to his /home directory will be erased when he logs out. The guest "
+"should save his important files to a USB key."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:140
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Enable guest account</guilabel>: Here you can enable or disable a "
+"guest account. The guest account allows a guest to log into and use the PC, "
+"but he has more restricted access than normal users."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:147
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Shell</guilabel>: This drop down list allows you to change the "
+"shell used by the user you are adding in the previous screen, options are "
+"Bash, Dash and Sh"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:153
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>User ID</guilabel>: Here you can set the user ID for the user you "
+"are adding in the previous screen. This is a number. Leave it blank unless "
+"you know what you are doing."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/addUser.xml:159
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Group ID</guilabel>: This lets you set the group ID. Also a "
+"number, usually the same one as for the user. Leave it blank unless you know "
+"what you are doing."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:11
+msgid "Choose the mount points"
+msgstr "选择挂载点"
+
+#. Made by marja on 2012 03 28
+#. NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED!
+#. SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back
+#. removed para xml:id's, marja, 20120409
+#. barjac 14/04/2012 Minor edit to improve grammar and replaced "at least ONE"
+#. with "a", as I can't imagine having more than one root partition ;)
+#. Lebarhon : I put [] where it seems having mistakes
+#. Marja: you're right, in English English it is "its type", however, the Americans
+#. write "it's type". And you're right about the redundant part, too, I removed it
+#. And JohnR says the Americans are WRONG! :-))
+#. 2012-04-19 Language proofreading done
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject condition='classical'> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-"
+"chooseMountpoints.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id="
+"\"chooseMountPoints-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject> <imageobject "
+"condition='live'> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"live-chooseMountpoints."
+"png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"live-chooseMountPoints-"
+"im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:37
+msgid ""
+"Here you see the Linux partitions that have been found on your computer. If "
+"you don't agree with the <application>DrakX</application> suggestions, you "
+"can change the mount points."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:42
+msgid ""
+"If you change anything, make sure you still have a <literal>/</literal> "
+"(root) partition."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:48
+msgid ""
+"Every partition is shown as follows: \"Device\" (\"Capacity\", \"Mount point"
+"\", \"Type\")."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:53
+msgid ""
+"\"Device\", is made up of: \"hard drive\", [\"hard drive number\"(letter)], "
+"\"partition number\" (for example, \"sda5\")."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:59
+msgid ""
+"If you have many partitions, you can choose many different mount points from "
+"the drop down menu, such as <literal>/</literal>, <literal>/home</literal> "
+"and <literal>/var</literal>. You can even make your own mount points, for "
+"instance <literal>/video</literal> for a partition where you want to store "
+"your films, or <literal>/cauldron-home</literal> for the <literal>/home</"
+"literal> partition of a cauldron install."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:69
+msgid ""
+"For partitions you don't need to have access to, you can leave the mount "
+"point field blank."
+msgstr "对于非必需的分区,挂载点一项可以留空。"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:75
+msgid ""
+"Choose <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> if you are not sure what to choose, "
+"and then tick <guilabel>Custom disk partitioning</guilabel>. In the screen "
+"that follows, you can click on a partition to see its type and size."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:81
+msgid ""
+"If you are sure the mount points are correct, click on <guibutton>Next</"
+"guibutton>, and choose whether you only want to format the partition(s) "
+"DrakX suggests, or more."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/bestTime.xml:10
+msgid "Clock settings"
+msgstr "时钟设置"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/bestTime.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-bestTime.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"bestTime-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-bestTime.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"bestTime-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/bestTime.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"In this step, you have to select on which time your internal clock is set, "
+"either local time or UTC time."
+msgstr "在这一步中,你需要选择内部时钟的计时方式(本地时间或 UTC 时间)。"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/bestTime.xml:23
+msgid "In advanced tab, you will find more options about clock settings."
+msgstr "在高级选项卡中,你可以找到更多有关时钟设置的选项。"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:3
+msgid "Boot Mageia as Live system"
+msgstr "引导 Mageia Live 系统"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:8
+msgid "Booting the medium"
+msgstr "引导媒体"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><info><title>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:13
+msgid "From a disc"
+msgstr "自磁盘"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"You can boot directly from the media you used to burn your image (CD-ROM, "
+"DVD-ROM...). You usually just need to insert it in your CD/DVD drive for the "
+"bootloader to launch the installation automatically after rebooting the "
+"computer. If that does not happen you may need to reconfigure your BIOS or "
+"press one key that will offer you to choose the peripheral from which the "
+"computer will boot."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"According to which hardware you have, and how it is configured, you get "
+"either one or another of the two screens below."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><info><title>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:29
+msgid "From a USB device"
+msgstr "自 USB 设备"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:32
+msgid ""
+"You can boot from the USB device on which you dumped your image ISO. "
+"According to your BIOS settings, the computer boots perhaps directly on the "
+"USB device already plugged in a port. If that does not happen you may need "
+"to reconfigure your BIOS or press one key that will offer you to choose the "
+"peripheral from which the computer will boot."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:43
+msgid "In BIOS/CSM/Legacy mode"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:47
+msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"live-bootCSM.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject><caption><para>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:52
+msgid "First screen while booting in BIOS mode"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:56
+msgid "In the middle menu, you have the choice between three actions:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:61
+msgid ""
+"Boot Mageia: That means Mageia 5 will start from the connected media (CD/DVD "
+"or USB stick) without writing anything on the disk, so expect a very slow "
+"system. Once the boot is done, you can proceed to the installation on a hard "
+"disk."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:68
+msgid ""
+"Install Mageia: This choice will directly install Mageia on a hard disk."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:73
+msgid ""
+"Boot from hard disk: This choice allows to boot from hard disk, as usual, "
+"when no media (CD/DVD or USB stick) is connected. (not working with Mageia "
+"5)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:79
+msgid "In the bottom menu, are the Boot Options:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:83
+msgid ""
+"F1 - Help. Explain the options \"splash\", \"apm\", \"acpi\" and \"Ide\""
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:88
+msgid "F2 - Language. Choose the display language of the screens."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:93
+msgid "F3 - Screen resolution. Choose between text, 640x400, 800x600, 1024x728"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:98
+msgid ""
+"F4 - CD-Rom. CD-Rom or Other. Normally, the installation is performed from "
+"the inserted installation medium. Here, select other sources, like FTP or "
+"NFS servers. If the installation is carried out in a network with an SLP "
+"server, select one of the installation sources available on the server with "
+"this option."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:106
+msgid ""
+"F5 - Driver. Yes or No. The system is aware about the presence of an "
+"optional disk with a driver update and will require its insertion during "
+"installation process."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:112
+msgid ""
+"F6 - Kernel options. This is a way to specify options according to your "
+"hardware and the drivers to use."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:120
+msgid "In UEFI mode"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:124
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-"
+"bootUEFI.png\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"bootUEFI-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject><caption><para>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:129
+msgid "First screen while booting on UEFI system from disk"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:133
+msgid ""
+"You have only the choice to run Mageia in Live mode (first choice) or to "
+"process the installation (second choice)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:135
+msgid ""
+"If you booted from a USB stick, you get two supplemental lines which are a "
+"duplicata of the previous lines suffixed with \"USB\". You have to choose "
+"them."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/bootLive.xml:139
+msgid ""
+"In each case, the first steps will be the same to choose language, timezone "
+"and keyboard, then the processes differ, with <link linkend=\"testing"
+"\">additional steps in Live mode</link>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:5
+msgid "Desktop Selection"
+msgstr "桌面环境选择"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:11
+msgid ""
+"Depending on your selection here, you may be offered further screens to fine "
+"tune your choice."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:13
+msgid ""
+"After the selection step(s), you will see a slide show during package "
+"installation. The slide show can be disabled by pressing the "
+"<guilabel>Details</guilabel> button"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-chooseDesktop.png\" align=\"center\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"Choose whether you prefer to use the <application>KDE</application> or "
+"<application>Gnome</application> desktop environment. Both come with a full "
+"set of useful applications and tools. Tick <guilabel>Custom</guilabel> if "
+"you want to use neither or both, or if you want something other than the "
+"default software choices for these desktop environments. The "
+"<application>LXDE</application> desktop is lighter than the previous two, "
+"sporting less eye candy and fewer packages installed by default."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:4
+msgid "Package Group Selection"
+msgstr "选择软件包组"
+
+#. 2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:10
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-choosePackageGroups.png\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"Packages have been sorted into groups, to make choosing what you need on "
+"your system a lot easier. The groups are fairly self explanatory, however "
+"more information about the content of each is available in tool-tips which "
+"become visible as the mouse is hovered over them."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:23
+msgid "Workstation."
+msgstr "工作区"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:27
+msgid "Server."
+msgstr "服务器。"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:31
+msgid "Graphical Environment."
+msgstr "图形界面环境"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:35
+msgid ""
+"Individual Package Selection: You can use this option to manually add or "
+"remove packages."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:39
+msgid ""
+"Read <xref linkend=\"minimal-install\"></xref> for instructions on how to do "
+"a minimal install (without or with X &amp; IceWM)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:4
+msgid "Choose Individual Packages"
+msgstr "选择单个软件包"
+
+#. 2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:11
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-choosePackagesTree.png\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:17
+msgid ""
+"Here you can add or remove any extra packages to customise your installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"After having made your choice, you can click on the <guibutton>floppy icon</"
+"guibutton> at the bottom of the page to save your choice of packages (saving "
+"to a USB key works, too). You can then use this file to install the same "
+"packages on another system, by pressing the same button during install and "
+"choosing to load it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/configureServices.xml:12
+msgid "Configure your Services"
+msgstr "配置服务"
+
+#. 2012-12-25 marja - moved this section out of misc-params.xml
+#. 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/configureServices.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureServices.png"
+"\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureServices-im1\"></"
+"imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureServices.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"Here you can set which services should (not) start when you boot your system."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureServices.xml:30
+msgid ""
+"There are four groups, click on the triangle before a group to expand it and "
+"see all services in it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureServices.xml:34
+msgid "The setting DrakX chose are usually good."
+msgstr "DrakX自动选择的设置通常可正常工作。"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureServices.xml:37
+msgid ""
+"If you highlight a service, some information about it is shown in the info "
+"box below."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureServices.xml:41
+msgid "Only change things when you know very well what you are doing."
+msgstr "只有在您完全了解您的行为的风险后再作出改动。"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:3
+msgid "Configure your Timezone"
+msgstr "配置时区"
+
+#. 2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml
+#. 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:11
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata xml:id="
+"\"configureTimezoneUTC-im1\" revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-"
+"configureTimezoneUTC.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject> "
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"live-timeZone.png\" condition=\"live\" "
+"format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"Choose your time zone by choosing your country or a city close to you in the "
+"same time zone."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"In next screen you can choose to set your hardware clock to local time or to "
+"GMT, also known as UTC."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:29
+msgid ""
+"If you have more than one operating system on your computer, make sure they "
+"are all set to local time, or all to UTC/GMT."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:11
+msgid "Choose an X Server (Configure your Graphic Card)"
+msgstr "选择一个X服务器(配置您的显示卡)"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" xml:id="
+"\"configureX_card_list-im1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_card_list.png\" format="
+"\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"DrakX has a very comprehensive database of video cards and will usually "
+"correctly identify your video device."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"If the installer has not correctly detected your graphic card and you know "
+"which one you have, you can select it from the tree by:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:27 en/configureX_monitor.xml:69
+msgid "vendor"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:31
+msgid "then the name of your card"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:35
+msgid "and the type of card"
+msgstr "卡的类型"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:39
+msgid ""
+"If you cannot find your card in the vendor lists (because it's not yet in "
+"the database or it's an older card) you may find a suitable driver in the "
+"Xorg category"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:43
+msgid ""
+"The Xorg listing provides more than 40 generic and open source video card "
+"drivers. If you still can't find a named driver for your card there is the "
+"option of using the vesa driver which provides basic capabilities."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:48
+msgid ""
+"Be aware that if you select an incompatible driver you may only have access "
+"to the Commandline Interface."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:51
+msgid ""
+"Some video card manufacturers provide proprietary drivers for Linux which "
+"may only be available in the Nonfree repository and in some cases only from "
+"the card manufacturers' websites."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:55
+msgid ""
+"The Nonfree repository needs to be explicitly enabled to access them. If "
+"you didn't select it previously, you should do this after your first reboot."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:4
+msgid "Graphic Card and Monitor Configuration"
+msgstr "显示卡和显示器配置"
+
+#. Marja 2012-08-10, copied setupX.xml to this file and replaced all "setupX" in the code by "configureX_chooser", because this is the correct filename for this page
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:11
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_chooser.png"
+"\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureX_chooser-im1\"> </"
+"imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:18
+msgid ""
+"No matter which graphical environment (also known as desktop environment) "
+"you chose for this install of <application>Mageia</application>, they are "
+"all based on a graphical user interface system called <acronym>X Window "
+"System</acronym>, or simply <acronym>X</acronym>. So in order for "
+"<acronym>KDE</acronym>, <acronym>Gnome</acronym>, <acronym>LXDE</acronym> or "
+"any other graphical environment to work well, the following <acronym>X</"
+"acronym> settings need to be correct. Choose the correct settings if you can "
+"see that <application>DrakX</application> didn't make a choice, or if you "
+"think the choice is incorrect."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:31
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis><guibutton>Graphic card</guibutton></emphasis>: Choose your card "
+"from the list if needed."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:37
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis><guibutton>Monitor</guibutton></emphasis>: You can choose "
+"<guilabel>Plug'n Play</guilabel> when applicable, or choose your monitor "
+"from the <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> or <guilabel>Generic</guilabel> list. "
+"Choose <guilabel>Custom</guilabel> if you prefer to manually set the "
+"horizontal and vertical refresh rates of your monitor."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:45
+msgid "Incorrect refresh rates may damage your monitor"
+msgstr "不正确的刷新率可能会损坏显示器"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:51
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis><guibutton>Resolution</guibutton></emphasis>: Set the desired "
+"resolution and color depth of your monitor here."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:56
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis><guibutton>Test</guibutton></emphasis>: The test button does not "
+"always appear during install. If the button is there, you can control your "
+"settings by pressing it. If you see a question asking you whether your "
+"settings are correct, you can answer \"yes\", and the settings will be kept. "
+"If you don't see anything, you'll return to the configuration screen and be "
+"able to reconfigure everything until the test is good. <emphasis>Make sure "
+"your settings are on the safe side if the test button isn't available</"
+"emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:67
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis><guibutton>Options</guibutton></emphasis>: Here you can choose to "
+"enable or disable various options."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:18
+msgid "Choosing your Monitor"
+msgstr "选择您的显示器"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"DrakX has a very comprehensive database of monitors and will usually "
+"correctly identify yours."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>Selecting a monitor with different characteristics could damage "
+"your monitor or video hardware. Please don't try something without knowing "
+"what you are doing.</emphasis> If in doubt you should consult your monitor "
+"documentation"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:34
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_monitor."
+"png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"configureX_monitor-im1\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:42
+msgid "<emphasis>Custom</emphasis>"
+msgstr "<emphasis>自定义</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:44
+msgid ""
+"This option allows you to set two critical parameters, the vertical refresh "
+"rate and the horizontal sync rate. Vertical refresh determines how often the "
+"screen is refreshed and horizontal sync is the rate at which scan lines are "
+"displayed."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:49
+msgid ""
+"It is <emphasis>VERY IMPORTANT</emphasis> that you do not specify a monitor "
+"type with a sync range that is beyond the capabilities of your monitor: you "
+"may damage your monitor. If in doubt, choose a conservative setting and "
+"consult your monitor documentation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:55
+msgid "<emphasis>Plug 'n Play</emphasis>"
+msgstr "<emphasis>即插即用</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:58
+msgid ""
+"This is the default option and tries to determine the monitor type from the "
+"monitor database."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:63
+msgid "<emphasis>Vendor</emphasis>"
+msgstr "<emphasis>供应商</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:65
+msgid ""
+"If the installer has not correctly detected your monitor and you know which "
+"one you have, you can select it from the tree by selecting:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:73
+msgid "the monitor manufacturers name"
+msgstr "显示器制造商名称"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:77
+msgid "the monitor description"
+msgstr "显示器描述"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:82
+msgid "<emphasis>Generic</emphasis>"
+msgstr "<emphasis>通用</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:84
+msgid ""
+"selecting this group displays nearly 30 display configurations such as "
+"1024x768 @ 60Hz and includes Flat panel displays as used in laptops. This is "
+"often a good monitor selection group if you need to use the Vesa card driver "
+"when your video hardware cannot be determined automatically. Once again it "
+"may be wise to be conservative in your selections."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:20
+msgid "Custom disk partitioning with DiskDrake"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:25
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject condition='classical'> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-diskdrake.png\" "
+"align=\"center\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition='live' > <imagedata "
+"fileref=\"live-diskdrake.png\" align=\"center\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:34
+msgid ""
+"If you wish to use encryption on your <literal>/</literal> partition you "
+"must ensure that you have a separate <literal>/boot</literal> partition. The "
+"encryption option for the <literal>/boot</literal> partition must NOT be "
+"set, otherwise your system will be unbootable."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:41
+msgid ""
+"Adjust the layout of your disk(s) here. You can remove or create "
+"partitions, change the filesystem of a partition or change its size and even "
+"view what is in them before you start."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:46
+msgid ""
+"There is a tab for every detected hard disk or other storage device, like an "
+"USB key. For example sda, sdb and sdc if there are three of them."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:50
+msgid ""
+"Push <guibutton>Clear all</guibutton> to wipe all partitions on the selected "
+"storage device"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:53
+msgid ""
+"For all other actions: click on the desired partition first. Then view it, "
+"or choose a filesystem and a mount point, resize it or wipe it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:57
+msgid "Continue until you adjusted everything to your wishes."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:60
+msgid "Click <guibutton>Done</guibutton> when you're ready."
+msgstr " 准备好时点击<guibutton>完成</guibutton>按钮。"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:64
+msgid ""
+"If you are installing Mageia on an UEFI system, check that an ESP (EFI "
+"System Partition) is present and correctly mounted on /boot/EFI (see above)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para><mediaobject>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:69
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-diskdrake2.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><figure>
+#: en/diskdrake.xml:68 en/installer.xml:41
+msgid "<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:7
+msgid "Partitioning"
+msgstr "分区"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:10
+msgid ""
+"In this screen you can see the content of your hard drive(s) and see the "
+"solutions the DrakX partitioning wizard found for where to install "
+"<application>Mageia</application>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"The options available from the list below will vary depending on your "
+"particular hard drive(s) layout and content."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-doPartitionDisks.png"
+"\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:27
+msgid "Use Existing Partitions"
+msgstr "使用现存的分区"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:30
+msgid ""
+"If this option is available, then existing Linux compatible partitions have "
+"been found and may be used for the installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:36
+msgid "Use Free Space"
+msgstr "使用空闲空间"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:38
+msgid ""
+"If you have unused space on your hard drive then this option will use it for "
+"your new Mageia installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:44
+msgid "Use Free Space on a Windows Partition"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:47
+msgid ""
+"If you have unused space on an existing Windows partition, the installer may "
+"offer to use it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:51
+msgid ""
+"This can be a useful way of making room for your new Mageia installation, "
+"but is a risky operation so you should make sure you have backed up all "
+"important files!"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:56
+msgid ""
+"Note that this involves shrinking the size of the Windows partition. The "
+"partition must be \"clean\", meaning that Windows must have closed down "
+"correctly the last time it was used. It must also have been defragmented, "
+"although this is not a guarantee that all files in the partition have been "
+"moved out of the area that is about to be used. It is highly recommended to "
+"back up your personal files."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:64
+msgid ""
+"With this option, the installer displays the remaining Windows partition in "
+"light blue and the future Mageia partition in dark blue with their intended "
+"sizes just under. You have the possibility to adapt these sizes by clicking "
+"and dragging the gap between both partitions. See the screen-shot below."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:71
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-doPartitionDisks2.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:78
+msgid "Erase and use Entire Disk."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:81
+msgid "This option will use the complete drive for Mageia."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:84
+msgid "Note! This will erase ALL data on the selected hard drive. Take care!"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:87
+msgid ""
+"If you intend to use part of the disk for something else, or you already "
+"have data on the drive that you are not prepared to lose, then do not use "
+"this option."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:94
+msgid "Custom"
+msgstr "自定义"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:96
+msgid ""
+"This gives you complete control over the placing of the installation on your "
+"hard drive(s)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:102
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Partitions sizing:</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:104
+msgid ""
+"The installer will share the available place out according to the following "
+"rules:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:109
+msgid ""
+"If the total available place is lower than 50 GB, only one partition is "
+"created for /, there is no separate partition for /home."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:115
+msgid ""
+"If the total available place is over 50 GB, then three partitions are created"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:120
+msgid ""
+"6/19 of the total available place is allocated to / with a maximum of 50 GB"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:125
+msgid "1/19 is allocated to swap with a maximum of 4 GB"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:129
+msgid "the rest (at least 12/19) is allocated to /home"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:135
+msgid ""
+"That means that from 160 GB and over of available place, the installer will "
+"create three partitions: 50 GB for /, 4 GB for swap and the rest for /home."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:140
+msgid ""
+"If you are using an UEFI system, the ESP (EFI System Partition) will be "
+"automatically detected, or created if it does not exist yet, and mounted on /"
+"boot/EFI. The \"Custom\" option is the only one that allows to check it has "
+"been correctly done"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:147
+msgid ""
+"Some newer drives are now using 4096 byte logical sectors, instead of the "
+"previous standard of 512 byte logical sectors. Due to lack of available "
+"hardware, the partitioning tool used in the installer has not been tested "
+"with such a drive. Also some ssd drives now use an erase block size over 1 "
+"MB. We suggest to pre-partition the drive, using an alternative partitioning "
+"tool like gparted, if you own such a device, and to use the following "
+"settings:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:155
+msgid "\"Align to\" \"MiB\""
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:157
+msgid "\"Free space preceding (MiB)\" \"2\""
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:159
+msgid ""
+"Also make sure all partitions are created with an even number of megabytes."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><title>
+#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:4 en/DrakLive-cover.xml:30 en/DrakLive.xml:3
+msgid "Installation from LIVE medium"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <book><info>
+#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:5 en/DrakX-cover.xml:5
+msgid "<publisher> <publishername>Mageia.org</publishername> </publisher>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <book><info><revhistory><revision><date>
+#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:10
+msgid "January 2015"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <book><info><revhistory><revision><revremark>
+#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:11
+msgid "Mageia 5"
+msgstr "Mageia 5"
+
+#. type: Content of: <book><info><cover><para>
+#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:15 en/DrakX-cover.xml:15
+msgid "The Official Documentation for Mageia"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <book><info><cover><mediaobject>
+#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:17 en/DrakX-cover.xml:17
+msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"mageia-2013.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para>
+#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:21 en/DrakLive.xml:12 en/DrakX-cover.xml:21
+#: en/DrakX.xml:12
+msgid ""
+"The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA "
+"3.0 license <link ns6:href=\"http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/"
+"\">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para>
+#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:24 en/DrakLive.xml:15 en/DrakX-cover.xml:24
+#: en/DrakX.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"This manual was produced with the help of the <link ns6:href=\"http://www."
+"calenco.com\">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link ns6:href=\"http://www."
+"neodoc.biz\">NeoDoc</link>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para>
+#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:26 en/DrakLive.xml:17 en/DrakX-cover.xml:26
+#: en/DrakX.xml:18
+msgid ""
+"It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link ns6:"
+"href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team\">Documentation Team</"
+"link>, if you would like to help improve this manual."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para><note>
+#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:31 en/DrakLive.xml:6 en/DrakX-cover.xml:37
+#: en/DrakX.xml:6
+msgid "<note>"
+msgstr "<note>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para><note><para>
+#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:32 en/DrakLive.xml:7 en/DrakX-cover.xml:38
+#: en/DrakX.xml:7
+msgid ""
+"No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which "
+"screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make "
+"while installing."
+msgstr ""
+"其他人不一定能在此手册中看到你所看到的安装页面。这取决于你的硬件规格以及安装"
+"时的选项。"
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para>
+#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:35 en/DrakLive.xml:10 en/DrakX-cover.xml:41
+#: en/DrakX.xml:10
+msgid "</note>"
+msgstr "</note>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><title>
+#: en/DrakX-cover.xml:4 en/DrakX-cover.xml:36 en/DrakX.xml:3
+msgid "Installation with DrakX"
+msgstr "用 DrakX 安装"
+
+#. type: Content of: <book><info><revhistory><revision><date>
+#: en/DrakX-cover.xml:10
+msgid "February 2014"
+msgstr "2014 年二月"
+
+#. type: Content of: <book><info><revhistory><revision><revremark>
+#: en/DrakX-cover.xml:11
+msgid "Mageia 4"
+msgstr "Mageia 4"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/exitInstall.xml:4
+msgid "Congratulations"
+msgstr "恭喜"
+
+#. Started by marja on 2012 03 29
+#. NEEDS TO BE WRITTEN AND THEN REVIEWED!
+#. marja - 2012-04-24 added screenshot and text
+#. same day, added "s" to "sytems"
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/exitInstall.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-exitInstall.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"exitInstall-im1\"> </imagedata> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/exitInstall.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"You have finished installing and configuring <application>Mageia</"
+"application> and it is now safe to remove the installation medium and reboot "
+"your computer."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/exitInstall.xml:25
+msgid ""
+"After reboot, in the bootloader screen, you can choose between the operating "
+"systems on your computer (if you have more than one)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/exitInstall.xml:28
+msgid ""
+"If you didn't adjust the settings for the bootloader, your Mageia install "
+"will be automatically selected and started."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/exitInstall.xml:31
+msgid "Enjoy!"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/exitInstall.xml:33
+msgid ""
+"Visit www.mageia.org if you have any questions or want to contribute to "
+"Mageia"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/formatPartitions.xml:4
+msgid "Formatting"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Made by marja on 2012 03 29
+#. NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED!
+#. marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot
+#. marja 2012-04-24 added emphasis tags in formatPartitions-pa1
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/formatPartitions.xml:18
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject condition='classical'> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-"
+"formatPartitions.png\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id="
+"\"formatPartitions-im1\"> </imagedata> </imageobject> <imageobject "
+"condition='live'> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"live-formatPartitions."
+"png\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"live-formatPartitions-im1\"> "
+"</imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/formatPartitions.xml:30
+msgid ""
+"Here you can choose which partition(s) you wish to format. Any data on "
+"partitions <emphasis>not</emphasis> marked for formatting will be saved."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/formatPartitions.xml:34
+msgid "Usually at least the partitions DrakX selected, need to be formatted"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/formatPartitions.xml:37
+msgid ""
+"Click on <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> to choose partitions you want to "
+"check for so called <emphasis>bad blocks</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para>
+#: en/formatPartitions.xml:42
+msgid ""
+"If you're not sure you have made the right choice, you can click on "
+"<guibutton>Previous</guibutton>, again on <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> "
+"and then on <guibutton>Custom</guibutton> to get back to the main screen. "
+"In that screen you can choose to view what is in your partitions."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/formatPartitions.xml:49
+msgid ""
+"When you are confident about the selection, click on <guibutton>Next</"
+"guibutton> to continue."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/installer.xml:17
+msgid "DrakX, the Mageia Installer"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"Whether you are new to GNU-Linux or an experienced user, the Mageia "
+"Installer is designed to help make your installation or upgrade as easy as "
+"possible."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:28
+msgid ""
+"The initial menu screen has various options, however the default one will "
+"start the installer, which will normally be all that you will need."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><figure><info><title>
+#: en/installer.xml:34
+msgid "Installation Welcome Screen"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><figure>
+#: en/installer.xml:33
+msgid "<placeholder type=\"info\" id=\"0\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><figure><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:37
+msgid ""
+"Here are the default welcome screens when using a Mageia DVD, The first one "
+"with a legacy system and the second one with an UEFI system:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><figure><mediaobject>
+#: en/installer.xml:42
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"BId-drakx-intro-im1\" revision=\"1\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"../dx-welcome.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/installer.xml:49
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx-welcome2.png\" align=\"center\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:54
+msgid ""
+"From this first screen, it is possible to set some personal preferences:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:59
+msgid ""
+"The language (for the installation only, may be different that the chosen "
+"language for the system) by pressing the key F2 (Legacy mode only)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject>
+#: en/installer.xml:66
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx-welcome-lang.png\" align=\"center\"/> "
+"</imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:71
+msgid "Use the arrow keys to select the language and press the key Enter."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:74
+msgid ""
+"Here is for example, the French welcome screen when using a Live DVD/CD. "
+"Note that the Live DVD/CD menu does not propose: <guilabel>Rescue System</"
+"guilabel>, <guilabel>Memory test</guilabel> and <guilabel>Hardware Detection "
+"Tool</guilabel>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject>
+#: en/installer.xml:82
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx-welcome4fr.png\" align=\"center\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:91
+msgid "Change the screen resolution by pressing the F3 key (Legacy mode only)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject>
+#: en/installer.xml:95
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx-welcome5def.png\" align=\"center\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:102
+msgid ""
+"Add some kernel options by pressing the <emphasis role=\"bold\">F6</"
+"emphasis> key for the legacy mode or the <emphasis role=\"bold\">e</"
+"emphasis> key for the UEFI mode."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:104
+msgid ""
+"If the installation fails, then it may be necessary to try again using one "
+"of the extra options. The menu called by F6 displays a new line called "
+"<guilabel>Boot options</guilabel> and propose four entries:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:109
+msgid "- Default, it doesn't alter anything in the default options."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:112
+msgid ""
+"- Safe Settings, priority is given to the safer options to the detriment of "
+"performances."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:115
+msgid ""
+"- No ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface), power management "
+"isn't taken into account."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:118
+msgid ""
+"- No Local APIC (Local Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller), it is "
+"about CPU interruptions, select this option if you are asked for."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:122
+msgid ""
+"When you select one of these entries, it modifies the default options "
+"displayed in the <guilabel>Boot Options</guilabel> line."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><note><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:126
+msgid ""
+"In some Mageia releases, it may happen that the entries selected with the "
+"key F6 does not appear in the <guilabel>Boot Options</guilabel> line, "
+"however, they are really taken into account."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject>
+#: en/installer.xml:133
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-welcome6opt.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:140
+msgid "Add more kernel options by pressing the key F1 (Legacy mode only)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:143
+msgid ""
+"Pressing F1 opens a new window with more available options. Select one with "
+"the arrow keys and press Enter to have more details or press the Esc key to "
+"go back to the welcome screen."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject>
+#: en/installer.xml:150
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx-welcomeHelp1.png\" align=\"center\"/> "
+"</imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:157
+msgid ""
+"The detailed view about the option splash. Press Esc or select "
+"<guilabel>Return to Boot Options</guilabel> to go back to the options list. "
+"These options can by added by hand in the <guilabel>Boot options</guilabel> "
+"line."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject>
+#: en/installer.xml:163
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-welcomeHelp2.png\"/> "
+"</imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><note><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:171
+msgid "The help is translated in the chosen language with the F2 key."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:177
+msgid ""
+"For more information about kernel options on legacy and UEFI systems, see: "
+"<link ns2:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/How_to_set_up_kernel_options"
+"\">https://wiki.mageia.org/en/How_to_set_up_kernel_options</link>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:180
+msgid ""
+"Here is the default welcome screen when using a Wired Network-based "
+"Installation CD (Boot.iso or Boot-Nonfree.iso images):"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:183
+msgid ""
+"It does not allow to change the language, the available options are "
+"described in the screen. For more information about using a Wired Network-"
+"based Installation CD, see <link ns2:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Boot."
+"iso_install\">the Mageia Wiki</link>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:189
+msgid "The keyboard layout is the American one."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/installer.xml:193
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"installer-im2\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"../dx-help.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/installer.xml:200
+msgid "The installation steps"
+msgstr "安装步骤"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:203
+msgid ""
+"The install process is divided into a number of steps, which can be followed "
+"on the side panel of the screen."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:206
+msgid ""
+"Each step has one or more screens which may also have <guibutton>Advanced</"
+"guibutton> buttons with extra, less commonly required, options."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:210
+msgid ""
+"Most screens have <guibutton>Help</guibutton> buttons which give further "
+"explanations about the current step."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:214
+msgid ""
+"If somewhere during install you decide to stop the installation, it is "
+"possible to reboot, but please think twice before you do this. Once a "
+"partition has been formatted or updates have started to be installed, your "
+"computer is no longer in the same state and rebooting it could very well "
+"leave you with an unusable system. If in spite of this you are very sure "
+"rebooting is what you want, go to a text terminal by pressing the three keys "
+"<guibutton>Alt Ctrl F2</guibutton> at the same time. After that, press "
+"<guibutton>Alt Ctrl Delete</guibutton> simultaneously to reboot."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/installer.xml:228
+msgid "Installation Problems and Possible Solutions"
+msgstr "安装问题和问题解决方案"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><info><title>
+#: en/installer.xml:234
+msgid "No Graphical Interface"
+msgstr "不使用图形界面"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:239
+msgid ""
+"After the initial screen you did not reach the language selection screen. "
+"This can happen with some graphic cards and older systems. Try using low "
+"resolution by typing <code>vgalo</code> at the prompt."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:246
+msgid ""
+"If the hardware is very old, a graphical installation may not be possible. "
+"In this case it is worth trying a text mode installation. To use this hit "
+"ESC at the first welcome screen and confirm with ENTER. You will be "
+"presented with a black screen with the word \"boot:\". Type \"text\" and hit "
+"ENTER. Now continue with the installation in text mode."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><info><title>
+#: en/installer.xml:258
+msgid "The Install Freezes"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:261
+msgid ""
+"If the system appeared to freeze during the installation, this may be a "
+"problem with hardware detection. In this case the automatic detection of "
+"hardware may be bypassed and dealt with later. To try this, type "
+"<code>noauto</code> at the prompt. This option may also be combined with "
+"other options as necessary."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><info><title>
+#: en/installer.xml:270
+msgid "RAM problem"
+msgstr "内存问题"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:273
+msgid ""
+"These will rarely be needed, but in some cases the hardware may report the "
+"available RAM incorrectly. To specify this manually, you can use the "
+"<code>mem=xxxM</code> parameter, where xxx is the correct amount of RAM. e."
+"g. <code>mem=256M</code> would specify 256MB of RAM."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><info><title>
+#: en/installer.xml:281
+msgid "Dynamic partitions"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/installer.xml:284
+msgid ""
+"If you converted your hard disk from \"basic\" format to \"dynamic\" format "
+"on Microsoft Windows, you must know that it is impossible to install Mageia "
+"on this disc. To go back to a basic disk, see the Microsoft documentation: "
+"<link ns2:href=\"http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc776315.aspx"
+"\">http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc776315.aspx</link>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/installUpdates.xml:3
+msgid "Updates"
+msgstr "更新"
+
+#. Made by marja on 2012 03 30
+#. NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED!
+#. marja 20120418 removed xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"" from section tag, trying to restore correct html filename
+#. marja, 2012-04-24 added screenshot
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/installUpdates.xml:13
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-installUpdates.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"installUpdates-im1\"></imagedata> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/installUpdates.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"Since this version of <application>Mageia</application> was released, some "
+"packages will have been updated or improved."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/installUpdates.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"Choose <guilabel>yes</guilabel> if you wish to download and install them, "
+"select <guilabel>no</guilabel> if you don't want to do this now, or if you "
+"aren't connected to the Internet"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/installUpdates.xml:28
+msgid "Then press <guibutton>Next</guibutton> to continue"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/login.xml:3
+msgid "Login screen"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/login.xml:7
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"login-"
+"im1\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"live-login.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject><caption><para>
+#: en/login.xml:12
+msgid "KDM login screen"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/login.xml:16
+msgid "Finally, you will come to the login screen."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/login.xml:18
+msgid ""
+"Enter your user name and user password, and in a few seconds you will find "
+"yourself with a loaded KDE or GNOME desktop, depending on which live medium "
+"you used. You can now start using your Mageia installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/login.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"You can find another part of our documentation in <link linkend=\"https://"
+"wiki.mageia.org/en/Category:Documentation\">the Mageia wiki</link>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/media_selection.xml:3
+msgid "Media Selection (Nonfree)"
+msgstr "介质选择 (Nonfree)"
+
+#. papoteur 2013-04-11 - created
+#. marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot + made title longer (because it was the same as for add_supplemental_media)
+#. marja 2013-04-16 s/in/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell
+#. marja 2013-04-17 s/xml:id="media-selection"/xml:id="media_selection"/ (html filename was wrong)
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/media_selection.xml:12
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-media_selection.png"
+"\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"media_selection-im1\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/media_selection.xml:18
+msgid ""
+"Here you have the list of available repositories. Not all repositories are "
+"available, according to which media you use for installing. The repositories "
+"selection determines which packages will be available for selection during "
+"the next steps."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/media_selection.xml:25
+msgid ""
+"The <emphasis>Core</emphasis> repository cannot be disabled as it contains "
+"the base of the distribution."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/media_selection.xml:30
+msgid ""
+"The <emphasis>Nonfree</emphasis> repository includes packages that are free-"
+"of-charge, i.e. Mageia may redistribute them, but they contain closed-source "
+"software (hence the name - Nonfree). For example this repository includes "
+"nVidia and ATI graphics card proprietary drivers, firmware for various WiFi "
+"cards, etc."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/media_selection.xml:38
+msgid ""
+"The <emphasis>Tainted</emphasis> repository includes packages released under "
+"a free license. The main criteria for placing packages in this repository is "
+"that they may infringe patents and copyright laws in some countries, e.g. "
+"Multimedia codecs needed to play various audio/video files; packages needed "
+"to play commercial video DVD, etc."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/minimal-install.xml:12
+msgid "Minimal Install"
+msgstr "最小安装"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/minimal-install.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"You can choose a Minimal Installation by de-selecting everything in the "
+"Package Group Selection screen, see <xref linkend=\"choosePackageGroups\"></"
+"xref>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/minimal-install.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"If desired, you can additionally tick the \"Individual package selection\" "
+"option in the same screen."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/minimal-install.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"Minimal Installation is intended for those with specific uses in mind for "
+"their <application>Mageia</application>, such as a server or a specialised "
+"workstation. You will probably use this option combined with the "
+"\"Individual package selection\" option mentioned above, to fine-tune your "
+"installation, see <xref linkend=\"choosePackagesTree\"></xref>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/minimal-install.xml:29
+msgid ""
+"If you choose this installation class, then the related screen will offer "
+"you a few useful extras to install, such as documentation and X."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/minimal-install.xml:31
+msgid ""
+"If selected, \"With X\" will also include IceWM as lightweight desktop "
+"environment."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/minimal-install.xml:33
+msgid ""
+"The basic documentation is provided in the form of man and info pages. It "
+"contains the man pages from the <link xlink:href=\"http://www.tldp.org/"
+"manpages/man.html\">Linux Documentation Project</link> and the <link xlink:"
+"href=\"http://www.gnu.org/software/coreutils/manual/\">GNU coreutils</link> "
+"info pages."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/minimal-install.xml:41
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-minimal-install.png\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"minimal-install-im1\"></imagedata> "
+"</imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:3
+msgid "Summary of miscellaneous parameters"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Started by marja on 2012 03 31
+#. NEEDS TO BE WRITTEN AND REVIEWED!
+#. marja - 2012 04 15 added some text, not much, unfortunately :(
+#. marja 2012-04-24 added screenshots
+#. JohnR 2012-04-25 Added text as requested by Psec :-)
+#. marja 2012-04-24 added 2 links to other help pages
+#. marja 2012-04-24 added some text in the drakxid-configureServices and
+#. the drakxid-miscellaneous section
+#. marja 2012-04-24 corrected "Magaia" in the last paragraph
+#. marja 2012-04-24 corrected para xml:id number in the last paragraph
+#. 2012-05-01 marja - added You-Cheng Hsieh's section about IBus etc.
+#. 2012-08-09 marja - replaced linkend="setupBootloaderBeginner" by linkend="setupBootloader"
+#. 2012-12-25 marja - moved configureTimezoneUTC, selectCountry, configureServices and SecurityLevel out to separate files
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:33
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-summary.png\" revision=\"1\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"summary-im1\" /> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:38
+msgid ""
+"DrakX made smart choices for the configuration of your system depending on "
+"the choices you made and on the hardware DrakX detected. You can check the "
+"settings here and change them if you want after pressing "
+"<guibutton>Configure</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:45
+msgid "System parameters"
+msgstr "系统参数"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:50
+msgid "<guilabel>Timezone</guilabel>"
+msgstr "<guilabel>时区</guilabel>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:52
+msgid ""
+"DrakX selected a time zone for you, depending on your preferred language. "
+"You can change it if needed. See also <xref linkend=\"configureTimezoneUTC\"/"
+">"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:58
+msgid "<guilabel>Country / Region</guilabel>"
+msgstr "<guilabel>国家/地区</guilabel>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:61
+msgid ""
+"If you are not in the selected country, it is very important that you "
+"correct the setting. See <xref linkend=\"selectCountry\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:67
+msgid "<guilabel>Bootloader</guilabel>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:69
+msgid "DrakX has made good choices for the bootloader setting."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:72
+msgid ""
+"Do not change anything, unless you know how to configure Grub and/or Lilo"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:75
+msgid "For more information, see <xref linkend=\"setupBootloader\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:80
+msgid "<guilabel>User management</guilabel>"
+msgstr "<guilabel>用户管理</guilabel>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:83
+msgid ""
+"You can add extra users here. They will each get their own <literal>/home</"
+"literal> directories."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:89
+msgid "<guilabel>Services</guilabel>:"
+msgstr "<guilabel>服务</guilabel>:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:91
+msgid ""
+"System services refer to those small programs which run the background "
+"(daemons). This tool allows you to enable or disable certain tasks."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:95
+msgid ""
+"You should check carefully before changing anything here - a mistake may "
+"prevent your computer from operating correctly."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:99
+msgid "For more information, see <xref linkend=\"configureServices\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:106
+msgid "Hardware parameters"
+msgstr "硬件参数"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:111
+msgid "<guilabel>Keyboard</guilabel>:"
+msgstr "<guilabel>键盘</guilabel>:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:113
+msgid ""
+"This is where you setup or change your keyboard layout which will depend on "
+"your location, language or type of keyboard."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:119
+msgid "<guilabel>Mouse</guilabel>:"
+msgstr "<guilabel>鼠标</guilabel>:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:121
+msgid ""
+"Here you can add or configure other pointing devices, tablets, trackballs "
+"etc."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:126
+msgid "<guilabel>Sound card</guilabel>:"
+msgstr "<guilabel>声卡</guilabel>:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:129
+msgid ""
+"The installer uses the default driver, if there is a default one. The option "
+"to select a different driver is only given when there is more than one "
+"driver for your card, but none of them is the default one."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:136
+msgid "<guilabel>Graphical interface</guilabel>:"
+msgstr "<guilabel>图形界面</guilabel>:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:139
+msgid "This section allows you to configure your graphic card(s) and displays."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:142
+msgid "For more information, see <xref linkend=\"configureX_chooser\"/>."
+msgstr "更多信息,参见 <xref linkend=\"configureX_chooser\"/>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:148
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"summaryBottom-im1\" revision=\"1\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-summaryBottom.png\" /> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:156
+msgid "Network and Internet parameters"
+msgstr "网络和 Internet 参数"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:162
+msgid "<guilabel>Network</guilabel>:"
+msgstr "<guilabel>网络</guilabel>:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:164
+msgid ""
+"You can configure your network here, but for network cards with non-free "
+"drivers it is better to do that after reboot, in the <application>Mageia "
+"Control Center</application>, if you have not yet enabled the Nonfree media "
+"repositories."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:171
+msgid ""
+"When you add a network card, do not forget to set your firewall to watch "
+"that interface as well."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:178
+msgid "<guilabel>Proxies</guilabel>:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:180
+msgid ""
+"A Proxy Server acts as an intermediary between your computer and the wider "
+"internet. This section allows you to configure your computer to utilize a "
+"proxy service."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:185
+msgid ""
+"You may need to consult your systems administrator to get the parameters you "
+"need to enter here"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:194
+msgid "Security"
+msgstr "安全"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:199
+msgid "<guilabel>Security Level</guilabel>:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:202
+msgid ""
+"Here you set the Security level for your computer, in most cases the default "
+"setting (Standard) is adequate for general use."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:206
+msgid "Check the option which best suits your usage."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:211
+msgid "<guilabel>Firewall</guilabel>:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:213
+msgid ""
+"A firewall is intended to be a barrier between your important data and the "
+"rascals out there on the internet who would compromise or steal it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:217
+msgid ""
+"Select the services that you wish to have access to your system. Your "
+"selections will depend on what you use your computer for."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para>
+#: en/misc-params.xml:222
+msgid "Bear in mind that allowing everything (no firewall) may be very risky."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/reboot.xml:9
+msgid "Reboot"
+msgstr "重新启动"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/reboot.xml:13
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-reboot.png\" format="
+"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"reboot-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/reboot.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"Once the bootloader has been installed, you will be prompted to halt your "
+"computer, remove the live CD and restart the computer. When you restart, you "
+"will see a succession of download progress bars. These indicate that the "
+"software media are being downloaded (see Software management)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/resizeFATChoose.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"Resize <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> "
+"partition"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/resizeFATChoose.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"You have more than one <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></"
+"application> partition. Choose which one should be made smaller to make "
+"space for installing <application>Mageia</application>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/securityLevel.xml:12
+msgid "Security Level"
+msgstr "安全级别"
+
+#. 2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml"
+#. 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/securityLevel.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-securityLevel.png\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"securityLevel-im1\"></imagedata> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/securityLevel.xml:24
+msgid "You can adjust your security level here."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/securityLevel.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"Leave the default settings as they are, if you don't know what to choose."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/securityLevel.xml:30
+msgid ""
+"After install, it will always be possible to adjust your security settings "
+"in the <guilabel>Security</guilabel> part of the Mageia Control Center."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:5
+msgid "Select and use ISOs"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:9
+msgid "Introduction"
+msgstr "简介"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:11
+msgid ""
+"Mageia is distributed via ISO images. This page will help you to choose "
+"which image match your needs."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:14
+msgid "There is two families of media:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:18
+msgid ""
+"Classical installer: After booting the media, it will follow a process "
+"allowing to choose what to install and how to configure your target system. "
+"This give you the maximal flexibility for a customized installation, in "
+"particular to choose which Desktop Environment you will install."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"LIVE media: you can boot the media in a real Mageia system without "
+"installing it, to see what you will get after installation. The "
+"installation process is simpler, but you get lesser choices."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:33
+msgid "Details are given in the next sections."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:37
+msgid "Media"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:40
+msgid "Definition"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:42
+msgid ""
+"Here, a medium (plural: media) is an ISO image file that allows you to "
+"install and/or update Mageia and by extension any physical support the ISO "
+"file is copied to."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:46
+msgid ""
+"You can find them <link ns4:href=\"http://www.mageia.org/en/downloads/"
+"\">here</link>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:50
+msgid "Classical installation media"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:53 en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:122
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:228
+msgid "Common features"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:57
+msgid "These ISOs use the traditional installer called drakx."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:62
+msgid ""
+"They are able to make a clean install or an update from previous releases."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:69
+msgid "DVD"
+msgstr "DVD"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:73
+msgid "Different media for architecture 32 or 64 bits."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:77
+msgid ""
+"Some tools are available in the Welcome screen: Rescue System, Memory Test, "
+"Hardware Detection Tool."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:82
+msgid "Each DVD contains many available desktop environments and languages."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:87
+msgid ""
+"You'll be given the choice during the installation to add non free software."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:94
+msgid "DVD dual arch"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:98
+msgid ""
+"Both architectures are present on the same medium, the choice is made "
+"automatically according to the detected CPU."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:103
+msgid "Uses Xfce desktop only."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:107
+msgid ""
+"Not all languages are available. (be, bg, ca, de, en, es, fr, it, mk, pl, "
+"pt, ru, sv, uk) TO BE CHECKED!"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:112
+msgid "It contains non free software."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:119
+msgid "Live media"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:126
+msgid ""
+"Can be used to preview the distribution without installing it on a HDD, and "
+"optionally install Mageia on to your HDD."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:131
+msgid "Each ISO contains only one desktop environment (KDE or GNOME)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:136 en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:200
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:218 en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:248
+msgid "Different media for 32 or 64 bit architectures."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:140
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Live ISOs can only be used to create clean "
+"installations, they cannot be used to upgrade from previous releases.</"
+"emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:146
+msgid "They contain non free software."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:152
+msgid "Live CD KDE"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:156 en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:192
+msgid "KDE desktop environment only."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:160 en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:178
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:252
+msgid "English language only."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:164 en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:182
+msgid "32 bit only."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:170
+msgid "Live CD GNOME"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:174 en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:210
+msgid "GNOME desktop environment only."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:188
+msgid "Live DVD KDE"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:196 en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:214
+msgid "All languages are present."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:206
+msgid "Live DVD GNOME"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:225
+msgid "Boot-only CD media"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:232
+msgid ""
+"Each one is a small image that contains no more than that which is needed to "
+"start the drakx installer and find drakx-installer-stage2 and other packages "
+"that are needed to continue and complete the install. These packages may be "
+"on the PC hard disk, on a local drive, on a local network or on the Internet."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:241
+msgid ""
+"These media are very light (less than 100 MB) and are convenient when "
+"bandwidth is too low to download a full DVD, a PC without a DVD drive or a "
+"PC that can't boot from a USB stick."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:258
+msgid "boot.iso"
+msgstr "boot.iso"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:262
+msgid ""
+"Contains only free software, for those people who refuse to use non-free "
+"software."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:269
+msgid "boot-nonfree.iso"
+msgstr "boot-nonfree.iso"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:273
+msgid ""
+"Contains non-free software (mostly drivers, codecs...) for people who need "
+"it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:282
+msgid "Downloading and Checking Media"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:285
+msgid "Downloading"
+msgstr "下载中"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:287
+msgid ""
+"Once you have chosen your ISO file, you can download it using either http or "
+"BitTorrent. In both cases, a window gives you some information, such as the "
+"mirror in use and the possibility to change if the bandwidth is to low. If "
+"http is chosen, you may also see something like"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:294
+msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"Checking.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:299
+msgid ""
+"md5sum and sha1sum are tools to check the ISO integrity. Use only one of "
+"them. Keep one of them <link linkend=\"integrity\">for further usage</link>. "
+"Then this window appears:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:304
+msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"Download.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:309
+msgid "Check the radio button Save File."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:313
+msgid "Checking the downloaded media integrity"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:316
+msgid ""
+"Both checksums are hexadecimal numbers calculated by an algorithm from the "
+"file to be downloaded. When you ask these algorithms to recalculate this "
+"number from your downloaded file, either you have the same number and your "
+"downloaded file is correct, or the number is different and you have a "
+"failure. A failure infers that you should retry the download."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:323
+msgid "Open a console, no need to be root, and:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:325
+msgid ""
+"- To use md5sum, type: [sam@localhost]$ <userinput>md5sum path/to/the/image/"
+"file.iso</userinput>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:328
+msgid ""
+"- To use sha1sum, type: [sam@localhost]$ <userinput>sha1sum path/to/the/"
+"image/file.iso</userinput>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:331
+msgid ""
+"and compare the obtained number on your computer (you may have to wait for a "
+"while) with the number given by Mageia. Example:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:335
+msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"../Md5sum.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:345
+msgid "Burn or dump the ISO"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:347
+msgid ""
+"The checked ISO can now be burned to a CD or DVD or dumped to a USB stick. "
+"These operations are not a simple copy and aim to make a boot-able medium."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:352
+msgid "Burning the ISO to a CD/DVD"
+msgstr "将ISO文件刻录到CD或DVD"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:354
+msgid ""
+"Use whatever burner you wish but ensure the burning device is set correctly "
+"to <emphasis role=\"bold\">burn an image</emphasis>, burn data or files is "
+"not correct. There is more information in <link ns4:href=\"https://wiki."
+"mageia.org/en/Writing_CD_and_DVD_images\">the Mageia wiki</link>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:361
+msgid "Dump the ISO to a USB stick"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:363
+msgid ""
+"All Mageia ISOs are hybrids, which means you can 'dump' them to a USB stick "
+"and then use it to boot and install the system."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><warning><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:367
+msgid ""
+"\"dumping\" an image onto a flash device destroys any previous file-system "
+"on the device; any other data will be lost and the partition capacity will "
+"be reduced to the image size."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:372
+msgid ""
+"To recover the original capacity, you must redo partitioning and re-format "
+"the USB stick."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:376
+msgid "Using a graphical tool within Mageia"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:378
+msgid ""
+"You can use a graphical tool like <link ns4:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/"
+"en/IsoDumper_Writing_ISO_images_on_USB_sticks\">IsoDumper</link>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:382
+msgid "Using a graphical tool within Windows"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:384
+msgid "You could try:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:386
+msgid ""
+"- <link ns4:href=\"http://rufus.akeo.ie/?locale=en_US\">Rufus</link> using "
+"the \"ISO image\" option;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:389
+msgid ""
+"- <link ns4:href=\"http://sourceforge.net/projects/win32diskimager\">Win32 "
+"Disk Imager</link>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:394
+msgid "Using Command line within a GNU/Linux system"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><warning><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:397
+msgid ""
+"It is potentially *dangerous* to do this by hand. You risk to overwrite a "
+"disc partition if you get the device-ID wrong."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:401
+msgid "You can also use the dd tool in a console:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:405
+msgid "Open a console"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:409
+msgid ""
+"Become root with the command <userinput>su -</userinput> (don't forget the "
+"final '-' )"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:413
+msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"../Root.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:420
+msgid ""
+"Plug your USB stick (do not mount it, this also means do not open any "
+"application or file manager that could access or read it)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:426
+msgid "Enter the command <userinput>fdisk -l</userinput>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:429
+msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"../Fdisk.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:434
+msgid ""
+"Alternatively, you can get the device name with the command <code>dmesg</"
+"code>: at end, you see the device name starting with <emphasis>sd</"
+"emphasis>, and <emphasis>sdd</emphasis> in this case:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><screen>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:439
+#, no-wrap
+msgid ""
+"[72594.604531] usb 1-1: new high-speed USB device number 27 using xhci_hcd\n"
+"[72594.770528] usb 1-1: New USB device found, idVendor=8564, idProduct=1000\n"
+"[72594.770533] usb 1-1: New USB device strings: Mfr=1, Product=2, SerialNumber=3\n"
+"[72594.770536] usb 1-1: Product: Mass Storage Device\n"
+"[72594.770537] usb 1-1: Manufacturer: JetFlash\n"
+"[72594.770539] usb 1-1: SerialNumber: 18MJTWLMPUCC3SSB\n"
+"[72594.770713] usb 1-1: ep 0x81 - rounding interval to 128 microframes, ep desc says 255 microframes\n"
+"[72594.770719] usb 1-1: ep 0x2 - rounding interval to 128 microframes, ep desc says 255 microframes\n"
+"[72594.771122] usb-storage 1-1:1.0: USB Mass Storage device detected\n"
+"[72594.772447] scsi host8: usb-storage 1-1:1.0\n"
+"[72595.963238] scsi 8:0:0:0: Direct-Access JetFlash Transcend 2GB 1100 PQ: 0 ANSI: 4\n"
+"[72595.963626] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] 4194304 512-byte logical blocks: (2.14 GB/2.00 GiB)\n"
+"[72595.964104] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Write Protect is off\n"
+"[72595.964108] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Mode Sense: 43 00 00 00\n"
+"[72595.965025] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] No Caching mode page found\n"
+"[72595.965031] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Assuming drive cache: write through\n"
+"[72595.967251] <emphasis>sdd</emphasis>: sdd1\n"
+"[72595.969446] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Attached SCSI removable disk"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:460
+msgid ""
+"Find the device name for your USB stick (by its size), for example <code>/"
+"dev/sdb</code> in the screenshot above, it is a 8GB USB stick."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:466
+msgid ""
+"Enter the command: # <userinput>dd if=path/to/the/ISO/file of=/dev/sdX "
+"bs=1M</userinput>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:469
+msgid "Where X=your device name eg: /dev/sdc"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:471
+msgid ""
+"Example: # <userinput>dd if=/home/user/Downloads/Mageia-4-x86_64-DVD.iso of=/"
+"dev/sdb bs=1M</userinput>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:477
+msgid "Enter the command: # <userinput>sync</userinput>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:481
+msgid "Unplug your USB stick, it is done"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/selectCountry.xml:13
+msgid "Select your Country / Region"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. 2012-12-25 marja - moved this section out of misc-params
+#. 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/selectCountry.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-selectCountry.png\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"selectCountry-im1\"></imagedata> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/selectCountry.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"Select your country or region. This is important for all kinds of settings, "
+"like the currency and wireless regulatory domain. Setting the wrong country "
+"can lead to not being able to use a Wireless network."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/selectCountry.xml:32
+msgid ""
+"If your country isn't in the list, click the <guilabel>Other Countries</"
+"guilabel> button and choose your country / region there."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/selectCountry.xml:37
+msgid ""
+"If your country is only in the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> list, "
+"after clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> it may seem a country from the "
+"first list was chosen. Please ignore this, DrakX will follow your real "
+"choice."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/selectCountry.xml:46
+msgid "Input method"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/selectCountry.xml:49
+msgid ""
+"In the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> screen you can also select an "
+"input method (at the bottom of the list). Input methods allow users to input "
+"multilingual characters (Chinese, Japanese, Korean, etc). IBus is the "
+"default input method in Mageia DVDs, Africa/India and Asia/no-India Live-"
+"CDs. For Asian and African locales, IBus will be set as default input method "
+"so users should not need to configure it manually. Other input methods(SCIM, "
+"GCIN, HIME, etc) also provide similar functions and can be installed if you "
+"added HTTP/FTP media before package selection."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/selectCountry.xml:61
+msgid ""
+"If you missed the input method setup during installation, you can access it "
+"after you boot your installed system via \"Configure your Computer\" -&gt; "
+"\"System\", or by running localedrake as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:21
+msgid "Install or Upgrade"
+msgstr "新安装或升级"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:25
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectInstallClass.png\" align="
+"\"center\" format=\"PNG\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:32
+msgid "Install"
+msgstr "安装"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:34
+msgid ""
+"Use this option for a fresh <application>Mageia</application> installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:39
+msgid "Upgrade"
+msgstr "升级"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:41
+msgid ""
+"If you have one or more <application>Mageia</application> installations on "
+"your system, the installer will allow you to upgrade one of them to the "
+"latest release."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para>
+#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:45
+msgid ""
+"Only upgrading from a previous Mageia version that was <emphasis>still "
+"supported</emphasis> when this installer's version was released, has been "
+"thoroughly tested. If you want to upgrade a Mageia version that had already "
+"reached its End\tOf Life when this one was released, then it is better to do "
+"a clean install while preserving your <literal>/home</literal> partition."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:56
+msgid ""
+"If during install you decide to stop the installation, it is possible to "
+"reboot, but please think twice before you do this. Once a partition has been "
+"formatted or updates have started to be installed, your computer isn't in "
+"the same state anymore and rebooting it could very well leave you with an "
+"unusable system. If in spite of that you are very sure rebooting is what you "
+"want, go to a text terminal by pressing the three keys <guilabel>Alt Ctrl "
+"F2</guilabel> at the same time. After that, press <guilabel>Alt Ctrl Delete</"
+"guilabel> simultaneously to reboot."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para>
+#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:67
+msgid ""
+"If you have discovered that you forgot to select an additional language, you "
+"can return from the \"Install or Upgrade\" screen to the language choice "
+"screen by pressing <guilabel>Alt Ctrl Home</guilabel>. Do <emphasis>not</"
+"emphasis> do this later in the install."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/selectKeyboardLive.xml:3
+msgid "Select keyboard"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/selectKeyboardLive.xml:7
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"selectKeyboardLive-im1\" revision=\"1\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"live-selectKeyboard.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/selectKeyboardLive.xml:12
+msgid ""
+"You will be required to set the keyboard layout you wish to use in Mageia​​. "
+"The default one is selected according to your language and timezone "
+"previously selected."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:14
+msgid "Keyboard"
+msgstr "键盘"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:17
+msgid ""
+"DrakX selects an appropriate keyboard for your language. If no suitable "
+"keyboard is found it will default to a US keyboard layout."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-selectKeyboard.png"
+"\" /> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:30
+msgid ""
+"Make sure that the selection is correct or choose another keyboard layout. "
+"If you don't know which layout your keyboard has, look in the specifications "
+"that came with your system, or ask the computer vendor. There may even be a "
+"label on the keyboard that identifies the layout. You can also look here: "
+"<link xlink:href=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout\">en."
+"wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout</link>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:40
+msgid ""
+"If your keyboard isn't in the list shown, click on <guibutton>More</"
+"guibutton> to get a full list, and select your keyboard there."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><warning><para>
+#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:45
+msgid ""
+"After choosing a keyboard from the <guibutton>More</guibutton> dialog, "
+"you'll return to the first keyboard choice dialog and it will seem as though "
+"a keyboard from that screen was chosen. You can safely ignore this anomaly "
+"and continue the installation: Your keyboard is the one you chose from the "
+"full list."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:55
+msgid ""
+"If you choose a keyboard based on non-Latin characters, you will see an "
+"extra dialog screen asking how you would prefer to switch between the Latin "
+"and non-Latin keyboard layouts"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/selectLanguage.xml:15
+msgid "Please choose a language to use"
+msgstr "请选择要使用的语言。"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/selectLanguage.xml:18
+msgid ""
+"Select your preferred language, by first expanding the list for your "
+"continent. <application>Mageia</application> will use this selection during "
+"the installation and for your installed system."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/selectLanguage.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"If it is likely that you will require several languages installed on your "
+"system, for yourself or other users, then you should use the "
+"<guibutton>Multiple languages</guibutton> button to add them now. It will be "
+"difficult to add extra language support after installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/selectLanguage.xml:29
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref="
+"\"dx2-selectLanguage.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject "
+"condition=\"live\"> <imagedata fileref=\"live-language.png\" format=\"\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/selectLanguage.xml:39
+msgid ""
+"Even if you choose more than one language, you must first choose one of them "
+"as your preferred language in the first language screen. It will also be "
+"marked as chosen in the multiple languages screen ."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectLanguage.xml:46
+msgid ""
+"If your keyboard language is not the same as your preferred language, then "
+"it is advisable to install the language of your keyboard as well."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectLanguage.xml:52
+msgid "Mageia uses UTF-8 (Unicode) support by default."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectLanguage.xml:54
+msgid ""
+"This may be disabled in the \"multiple languages\" screen if you know that "
+"it is inappropriate for your language. Disabling UTF-8 applies to all "
+"installed languages."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/selectLanguage.xml:60
+msgid ""
+"You can change the language of your system after installation in the Mageia "
+"Control Center -> System -> Manage localization for your system."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/selectMouse.xml:4
+msgid "Select mouse"
+msgstr "选择鼠标"
+
+#. Made by marja on 2012 04 11
+#. NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED!
+#. adding some "real" text now that we know the page shows up in the right place
+#. marja 2012-04-24 adding screenshot
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/selectMouse.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectMouse.png\" align=\"center\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" > </imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/selectMouse.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"If you are not happy with how your mouse responds, you can select a "
+"different one here."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/selectMouse.xml:25
+msgid ""
+"Usually, <guilabel>Universal</guilabel> - <guilabel>Any PS/2 and USB mice</"
+"guilabel> is a good choice."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/selectMouse.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"Select <guilabel>Universal</guilabel> - <guilabel>Force evdev</guilabel> to "
+"configure the buttons that do not work on a mouse with six or more buttons."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:5
+msgid "Add or Modify a Boot Menu Entry"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:10
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-"
+"bootloaderConfiguration.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id="
+"\"bootloaderConfiguration-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:16 en/setupBootloader.xml:17
+msgid "With a Bios system"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:18
+msgid ""
+"You can add an entry or modify the one you select first, by pressing the "
+"relevant button in the <emphasis>Bootloader Configuration</emphasis> screen "
+"and editing the screen that pops up on top of it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"If you have chosen <code>Grub 2</code> as your bootloader, you cannot use "
+"this tool to edit entries at this step, press 'Next'. You need to manually "
+"edit <code>/boot/grub2/custom.cfg</code> or use <code>grub-customizer</code> "
+"instead."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:30
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"setupBootloaderAddEntry-"
+"im1\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-setupBootloaderAddEntry."
+"png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:35
+msgid ""
+"Some things that can be done without any risk, are changing the label of an "
+"entry and ticking the box to make an entry the default one."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:39
+msgid ""
+"You can add the proper version number of an entry, or rename it completely."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:42
+msgid ""
+"The default entry is the one the systems boots into if you don't make a "
+"choice while booting up."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><warning><para>
+#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:46
+msgid ""
+"Editing other things can leave you with an unbootable system. Please don't "
+"just try something without knowing what you are doing."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:53 en/setupBootloader.xml:109
+msgid "With an UEFI system"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:55
+msgid ""
+"In this case you are using Grub2-efi and you cannot use this tool to edit "
+"entries at this step. To do that you need to manually edit <code>/boot/grub2/"
+"custom.cfg</code> or use <code>grub-customizer</code> instead. All you can "
+"do here, is to choose the default entry in the drop down list."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:61
+msgid ""
+"After a click on the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> button, another drop down "
+"list allows to choose the video resolution for Grub2 which is a graphical "
+"boot loader."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:66
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-bootloaderConfiguration2.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:7
+msgid "Bootloader main options"
+msgstr "引导程序的主要选项"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:11
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-"
+"setupBootloader.png\" xml:id=\"setupBootloader-im1\" format=\"PNG\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"If you prefer different bootloader settings to those chosen automatically by "
+"the installer, you can change them here."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"You may already have another operating system on your machine, in which case "
+"you need to decide whether to add Mageia to your existing bootloader, or "
+"allow Mageia to create a new one."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><tip><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:29
+msgid "The Mageia graphical menus are nice :"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><info><title>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:34
+msgid "Using a Mageia bootloader"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:38
+msgid ""
+"By default, Mageia writes a new GRUB (legacy) bootloader into the MBR "
+"(Master Boot Record) of your first hard drive. If you already have other "
+"operating systems installed, Mageia attempts to add them to your new Mageia "
+"boot menu."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:44
+msgid ""
+"Mageia now also offers GRUB2 as an optional bootloader in addition to GRUB "
+"legacy and Lilo."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><warning><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:48
+msgid ""
+"Linux systems which use the GRUB2 bootloader are not currently supported by "
+"GRUB (legacy) and will not be recognized if the default GRUB bootloader is "
+"used."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><warning><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:53
+msgid ""
+"The best solution here is to use the GRUB2 bootloader which is available at "
+"the Summary page during installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><info><title>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:61
+msgid "Using an existing bootloader"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:65
+msgid ""
+"If you decide to use an existing bootloader then you will need to remember "
+"to STOP at the summary page during the installation and click the Bootloader "
+"<guibutton>Configure</guibutton> button, which will allow you to change the "
+"bootloader install location."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:71
+msgid ""
+"Do not select a device e.g.\"sda\", or you will overwrite your existing MBR. "
+"You must select the root partition that you chose during the partitioning "
+"phase earlier, e.g. sda7."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:76
+msgid "To be clear, sda is a device, sda7 is a partition on that device."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><tip><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:80
+msgid ""
+"Go to tty2 with Ctrl+Alt+F2 and type <literal>df</literal> to check where "
+"your <literal>/</literal> (root) partition is. Ctrl+Alt+F7 takes you back to "
+"the installer screen."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:86
+msgid ""
+"The exact procedure for adding your Mageia system to an existing bootloader "
+"is beyond the scope of this help, however in most cases it will involve "
+"running the relevant bootloader installation program which should detect and "
+"add it automatically. See the documentation for the operating system in "
+"question."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><info><title>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:96
+msgid "Bootloader advanced option"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:100
+msgid ""
+"If you have very limited disk space for the <literal>/</literal> partition "
+"that contains <literal>/tmp</literal>, click on <guibutton>Advanced</"
+"guibutton> and check the box for <guilabel>Clean /tmp at each boot</"
+"guilabel>. This helps to maintain some free space."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:111
+msgid ""
+"With an UEFI system, the user interface is slightly different as you cannot "
+"choose the boot loader since only Grub2-efi is available."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:115
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-setupBootloader2.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:120
+msgid ""
+"If Mageia is the first system installed on your computer, the installer "
+"created an ESP (EFI System Partition) to receive the bootloader (Grub2-efi). "
+"If there was already UEFI operating systems previously installed on your "
+"computer (Windows 8 for example), the Mageia installer detected the existing "
+"ESP created by Windows and added grub2-efi. Although it is possible to have "
+"several ESPs, only one is advised and enough whatever the number of "
+"operating systems you have."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/setupBootloader.xml:128
+msgid "Don't modify the \"Boot Device\" unless really knowing what you do."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/setupSCSI.xml:11
+msgid "Setup SCSI"
+msgstr "设置SCSI"
+
+#. Made by marja on 2012 04 02
+#. NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED!
+#. JohnR - edited 2012-03-03
+#. SimonNZG has reviewed 2012-04-03 (changed editted to edited in JohnR's comment ;-)
+#. barjac has re-reviewed and made some minor tweaks. Revisions incremented.
+#. marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot
+#. marja 2012-04-25 replacing John's version 1.6 because that one was based on the
+#. Mdv doc instead of on our setupSCSI file
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/setupSCSI.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-setupSCSI.png\" format="
+"\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"setupSCSI-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/setupSCSI.xml:32
+msgid ""
+"DrakX usually detects hard disks correctly. With some older SCSI controllers "
+"it may be unable to determine the correct drivers to use and subsequently "
+"fail to recognise the drive."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/setupSCSI.xml:36
+msgid ""
+"If this happens, you will need to manually tell Drakx which SCSI drive(s) "
+"you have."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/setupSCSI.xml:39
+msgid "DrakX should then be able to configure the drive(s) correctly."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/soundConfig.xml:11
+msgid "Sound Configuration"
+msgstr "声音配置"
+
+#. Started by marja on 2013-12-07
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/soundConfig.xml:17
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-soundConfig.png\" revision=\"1\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"soundConfig-im1\" /> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/soundConfig.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"In this screen the name of the driver that the installer chose for your "
+"sound card is given, which will be the default driver if we have a default "
+"one."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/soundConfig.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"The default driver should work without problems. However, if after install "
+"you do encounter problems, then run <command>draksound</command> or start "
+"this tool via MCC (Mageia Control Center), by choosing the "
+"<guilabel>Hardware</guilabel> tab and clicking on <guilabel>Sound "
+"Configuration</guilabel> at the top right of the screen."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/soundConfig.xml:33
+msgid ""
+"Then, in the draksound or \"Sound Configuration\" tool screen, click on "
+"<guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> and then on <guibutton>Troubleshooting</"
+"guibutton> to find very useful advice about how to solve the problem."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/soundConfig.xml:41
+msgid "Advanced"
+msgstr "高级"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/soundConfig.xml:44
+msgid ""
+"Clicking <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> in this screen, during install, is "
+"useful if there is no default driver and there are several drivers "
+"available, but you think the installer selected the wrong one."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/soundConfig.xml:49
+msgid ""
+"In that case you can select a different driver after clicking on "
+"<guibutton>Let me pick any driver</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:4
+msgid "Confirm hard disk to be formatted"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. Made by marja on 2012 04 03
+#. test comment - johnr
+#. 2012-04-24 marja - replaced "if you are not sure you selected the correct
+#. hard disk." with "if you are not sure about your choice", because I'm sure I
+#. saw this help screen when I had only one HD
+#. 2013-05-05 marja added screenshot
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject condition='live'> <imagedata fileref=\"live-takeOverHdConfirm."
+"png\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" ></imagedata> </imageobject> "
+"<imageobject condition='classical'> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-"
+"takeOverHdConfirm.png\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" ></imagedata> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"Click on <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> if you are not sure about your "
+"choice."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:30
+msgid ""
+"Click on <guibutton>Next</guibutton> if you are sure and want to erase every "
+"partition, every operating system and all data on that hard disk."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/testing.xml:9
+msgid "Testing Mageia as Live system"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/testing.xml:14
+msgid "Live mode"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/testing.xml:18
+msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"live-liveMode.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/testing.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"You get this screen if you selected \"Boot Mageia\". If not, you get the "
+"\"<link linkend=\"doPartitionDisks\">Partitioning</link> step\""
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><info><title>
+#: en/testing.xml:28
+msgid "Testing hardware"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/testing.xml:31
+msgid ""
+"One of the Live mode goals is to test if the hardware is correctly managed "
+"by Mageia. You can check if all devices have a driver in the Hardware "
+"section of the Mageia Control Center. You can test the most current devices:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/testing.xml:38
+msgid "network interface: configure it with net_applet"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/testing.xml:42
+msgid "graphical card: if you see the previous screen, it's already OK."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/testing.xml:47
+msgid "webcam:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/testing.xml:51
+msgid "sound: a jingle has already been played"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/testing.xml:55
+msgid "printer: configure it and print a test page"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/testing.xml:59
+msgid "scanner: scan a document from ..."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/testing.xml:63
+msgid ""
+"If all is OK for you, you can process to the installation. If not, you can "
+"leave with the quit button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><remark>
+#: en/testing.xml:66
+msgid "The configuration settings you made here are kept for the installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><info><title>
+#: en/testing.xml:72
+msgid "Launch installation"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject>
+#: en/testing.xml:76
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"live-liveMode-install.png\"/> </"
+"imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/testing.xml:81
+msgid ""
+"To launch the installation of Mageia LiveCD or Live DVD to the hard disc or "
+"SSD drive, simply click on the icon \"Install on Hard Disk\". You will get "
+"this screen, and then the \"<link linkend=\"doPartitionDisks\">Partitioning</"
+"link> step\" as for the direct installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/uninstall-Mageia.xml:3
+msgid "Uninstalling Mageia"
+msgstr "正在卸载Mageia"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/uninstall-Mageia.xml:9
+msgid "Howto"
+msgstr "Howto"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/uninstall-Mageia.xml:11
+msgid ""
+"If Mageia didn't convince you or you can't install it correctly, in short "
+"you want get rid of it. That is your right and Mageia also gives you the "
+"possibility to uninstall. This is not true for every operating system."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/uninstall-Mageia.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"After your data backup, reboot your installation Mageia DVD and select "
+"Rescue system, then, Restore Windows boot loader. At the next boot, you will "
+"only have Windows with no option to choose your operating system."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/uninstall-Mageia.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"To recover the space used by Mageia partitions on Windows, click on "
+"<code>Start -> Control Panel -> Administrative Tools -> Computer Management -"
+"> Storage -> Disk Management</code> to access to the partition management. "
+"You will recognize the Mageia partition because they are labeled "
+"<guilabel>Unknown</guilabel>, and also by their size and place in the disk. "
+"Right click on each of these partitions and select <guibutton>Delete</"
+"guibutton>. The space will be freed."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/uninstall-Mageia.xml:28
+msgid ""
+"If you are using Windows XP, you can create a new partition and format it "
+"(FAT32 or NTFS). It will get a partition letter."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/uninstall-Mageia.xml:31
+msgid ""
+"If you have Vista or 7, you have one more possibility, you can extend the "
+"existing partition that is at the left of the freed space. There are other "
+"partitioning tools that can be used, such as gparted, available for both "
+"windows and linux. As always, when changing partitions, be very careful, and "
+"make sure all important things have been backed up."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/unused.xml:9
+msgid "Keep or delete unused material"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/unused.xml:13
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-unused.png\" format="
+"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"unused-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/unused.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"In this step, the installer looks for unused locales packages and unused "
+"hardware packages. Then it proposes you to delete them. It is a good idea to "
+"accept, except if you prepare an installation which has to run on different "
+"hardware."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
+#: en/unused.xml:25
+msgid ""
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"live-unused-InstallationProgress.png\"/> "
+"</imageobject>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/unused.xml:30
+msgid ""
+"The next step is the copying of files on hard disk. This takes some minutes. "
+"At the end, you get a blank screen for some time, it's normal."
+msgstr ""
diff --git a/docs/installer/zh_CN/DrakLive-cover.xml b/docs/installer/zh_CN/DrakLive-cover.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a92d34b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/zh_CN/DrakLive-cover.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+<book xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_CN" xml:id="Quick-Startup">
+ <info>
+ <title>Installation from LIVE medium</title>
+ <publisher> <publishername>Mageia.org</publishername> </publisher>
+ <revhistory>
+ <revision>
+ <date>January 2015</date>
+ <revremark>Mageia 5</revremark>
+ </revision>
+ </revhistory>
+ <cover>
+ <para role="tagline">The Official Documentation for Mageia</para>
+ <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="mageia-2013.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+ <para>The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA
+3.0 license <link
+ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>.
+ </para>
+ <para>This manual was produced with the help of the <link
+ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link
+ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>.
+ </para>
+ <para>It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link
+ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Documentation
+Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual.</para>
+ </cover>
+ </info>
+ <article>
+ <title>Installation from LIVE medium</title>
+ <para><note>
+ <para>其他人不一定能在此手册中看到你所看到的安装页面。这取决于你的硬件规格以及安装时的选项。</para>
+ </note></para>
+ <xi:include href="SelectAndUseISOs2.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="bootLive.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="selectLanguage.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="acceptLicense.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="configureTimezoneUTC.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="bestTime.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="selectKeyboardLive.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="testing.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="doPartitionDisks.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="ask_mntpoint_s.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="takeOverHdConfirm.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="diskdrake.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="formatPartitions.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="unused.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="setupBootloader.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="reboot.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="addUser.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="login.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="uninstall-Mageia.xml"/>
+ </article>
+</book> \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/zh_CN/DrakLive.xml b/docs/installer/zh_CN/DrakLive.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..fc1d2158
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/zh_CN/DrakLive.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><article xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_CN" xml:id="Quick-Startup">
+ <info>
+ <title>Installation from LIVE medium</title>
+
+ <cover>
+ <para><note>
+ <para>其他人不一定能在此手册中看到你所看到的安装页面。这取决于你的硬件规格以及安装时的选项。</para>
+ </note></para>
+
+ <para xml:id="CC_BY-SA">The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA
+3.0 license <link
+ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>.</para>
+
+ <para>This manual was produced with the help of the <link
+ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link
+ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>.</para>
+
+ <para>It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link
+ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Documentation
+Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual.</para>
+ </cover>
+ </info>
+
+ <xi:include href="SelectAndUseISOs2.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="bootLive.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="selectLanguage.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="acceptLicense.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="configureTimezoneUTC.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="bestTime.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="selectKeyboardLive.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="testing.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="doPartitionDisks.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="ask_mntpoint_s.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="takeOverHdConfirm.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="diskdrake.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="formatPartitions.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="unused.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="setupBootloader.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="reboot.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="addUser.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="login.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="uninstall-Mageia.xml"/>
+</article> \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/zh_CN/DrakX-cover.xml b/docs/installer/zh_CN/DrakX-cover.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c2701b57
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/zh_CN/DrakX-cover.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,144 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+<book xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_CN" xml:id="Quick-Startup">
+ <info>
+ <title>用 DrakX 安装</title>
+ <publisher> <publishername>Mageia.org</publishername> </publisher>
+ <revhistory>
+ <revision>
+ <date>2014 年二月</date>
+ <revremark>Mageia 4</revremark>
+ </revision>
+ </revhistory>
+ <cover>
+ <para role="tagline">The Official Documentation for Mageia</para>
+ <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="mageia-2013.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+ <para>The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA
+3.0 license <link
+ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>.
+ </para>
+ <para>This manual was produced with the help of the <link
+ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link
+ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>.
+ </para>
+ <para>It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link
+ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Documentation
+Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual.</para>
+ </cover>
+ </info>
+ <article>
+
+
+
+
+
+
+<!-- 2013-01-03 removed link to choosePackages.xml, because there is no link to it in installer. link to setupX has been removed for the same reason, before-->
+<!--2013-03-31 removed link to setupBootloaderBeginner.xml, because that page is no longer needed -->
+<!--2013-05-10 hid includes for resizeFATchoose.xml and takeOverHdChoose.xml, because since over a year ago, no one in docteam managed to make a screenshot of those installer screens. They seem to already have been obsoleted in Mandriva -->
+<!--2013-05-10 put ask_mntpoint_s.xml before takeOverHdConfirm.xml, to better reflect the order in which the links to them appear in doPartitionDisks.xml -->
+<!--2013-12-08 add soundConfig.xml -->
+<title>用 DrakX 安装</title>
+ <para><note>
+ <para>其他人不一定能在此手册中看到你所看到的安装页面。这取决于你的硬件规格以及安装时的选项。</para>
+ </note></para>
+
+
+
+ <!-- <xi:include href="drakx-intro.xml"/>
+ -->
+<xi:include href="SelectAndUseISOs2.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="installer.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="selectLanguage.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="acceptLicense.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="setupSCSI.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="selectInstallClass.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="selectKeyboard.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="doPartitionDisks.xml"/>
+
+
+
+ <!-- <xi:include href="resizeFATChoose.xml"/>
+
+
+ <xi:include href="takeOverHdChoose.xml"/> -->
+<xi:include href="ask_mntpoint_s.xml"/>
+
+<xi:include href="takeOverHdConfirm.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="diskdrake.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="formatPartitions.xml"/>
+
+<xi:include href="add_supplemental_media.xml"/>
+
+<xi:include href="media_selection.xml"/>
+
+<xi:include href="chooseDesktop.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="choosePackageGroups.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="minimal-install.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="choosePackagesTree.xml"></xi:include>
+
+
+
+ <!-- <xi:include href="setRootPassword.xml">
+</xi:include> -->
+<xi:include href="addUser.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="configureX_chooser.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="configureX_card_list.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="configureX_monitor.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="setupBootloader.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml"/>
+
+
+
+ <!-- <xi:include href="setupYabootGeneral.xml">
+</xi:include>
+
+ <xi:include href="setupYabootAddEntry.xml"></xi:include>
+
+ <xi:include href="summary.xml"></xi:include> -->
+<xi:include href="misc-params.xml"/>
+
+<xi:include href="configureTimezoneUTC.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="selectCountry.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="configureServices.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="selectMouse.xml"/>
+
+<xi:include href="soundConfig.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="securityLevel.xml"></xi:include>
+
+
+
+
+ <!-- <xi:include href="configureNetwork.xml">
+</xi:include> -->
+<xi:include href="installUpdates.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="exitInstall.xml"/>
+
+
+ <!--STILL TO BE WRITTEN: <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="uninstall-Mageia.xml"/>
+ -->
+</article>
+</book>
diff --git a/docs/installer/zh_CN/DrakX.xml b/docs/installer/zh_CN/DrakX.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..54203ded
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/zh_CN/DrakX.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,133 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+<article xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_CN" xml:id="Quick-Startup">
+ <!-- 2013-01-03 removed link to choosePackages.xml, because there is no link to it in installer. link to setupX has been removed for the same reason, before-->
+<!--2013-03-31 removed link to setupBootloaderBeginner.xml, because that page is no longer needed -->
+<!--2013-05-10 hid includes for resizeFATchoose.xml and takeOverHdChoose.xml, because since over a year ago, no one in docteam managed to make a screenshot of those installer screens. They seem to already have been obsoleted in Mandriva -->
+<!--2013-05-10 put ask_mntpoint_s.xml before takeOverHdConfirm.xml, to better reflect the order in which the links to them appear in doPartitionDisks.xml -->
+<!--2013-12-08 add soundConfig.xml -->
+<!--2014-05-07 add selectAndUseISOs2.xml Papoteur-->
+<!-- <xi:include href="drakx-intro.xml"/>
+ -->
+<info>
+ <title>用 DrakX 安装</title>
+
+ <cover>
+ <para><note>
+ <para>其他人不一定能在此手册中看到你所看到的安装页面。这取决于你的硬件规格以及安装时的选项。</para>
+ </note></para>
+
+ <para xml:id="CC_BY-SA">The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA
+3.0 license <link
+ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>.</para>
+
+ <para>This manual was produced with the help of the <link
+ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link
+ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>.</para>
+
+ <para>It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link
+ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Documentation
+Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual.</para>
+ </cover>
+ </info>
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ <xi:include href="SelectAndUseISOs2.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="installer.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="selectLanguage.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="acceptLicense.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="setupSCSI.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="selectInstallClass.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="selectKeyboard.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="doPartitionDisks.xml"/>
+
+
+
+ <!-- <xi:include href="resizeFATChoose.xml"/>
+
+
+ <xi:include href="takeOverHdChoose.xml"/> -->
+<xi:include href="ask_mntpoint_s.xml"/>
+
+<xi:include href="takeOverHdConfirm.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="diskdrake.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="formatPartitions.xml"/>
+
+<xi:include href="add_supplemental_media.xml"/>
+
+<xi:include href="media_selection.xml"/>
+
+<xi:include href="chooseDesktop.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="choosePackageGroups.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="minimal-install.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="choosePackagesTree.xml"></xi:include>
+
+
+
+ <!-- <xi:include href="setRootPassword.xml">
+</xi:include> -->
+<xi:include href="addUser.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="configureX_chooser.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="configureX_card_list.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="configureX_monitor.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="setupBootloader.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml"/>
+
+
+
+ <!-- <xi:include href="setupYabootGeneral.xml">
+</xi:include>
+
+ <xi:include href="setupYabootAddEntry.xml"></xi:include>
+
+ <xi:include href="summary.xml"></xi:include> -->
+<xi:include href="misc-params.xml"/>
+
+<xi:include href="configureTimezoneUTC.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="selectCountry.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="configureServices.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="selectMouse.xml"/>
+
+<xi:include href="soundConfig.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="securityLevel.xml"></xi:include>
+
+
+
+
+ <!-- <xi:include href="configureNetwork.xml">
+</xi:include> -->
+<xi:include href="installUpdates.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include href="exitInstall.xml"/>
+
+ <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="uninstall-Mageia.xml"/>
+</article>
diff --git a/docs/installer/zh_CN/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml b/docs/installer/zh_CN/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..579d52d4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/zh_CN/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,460 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="Select-and-use-ISOs" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_CN">
+
+
+ <info>
+ <!-- Made by Lebarhon 2014 03 26 -->
+<title xml:id="Select-and-use-ISOs-ti1">Select and use ISOs</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>简介</title>
+
+ <para>Mageia is distributed via ISO images. This page will help you to choose
+which image match your needs.</para>
+
+ <para>There is two families of media:</para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Classical installer: After booting the media, it will follow a process
+allowing to choose what to install and how to configure your target
+system. This give you the maximal flexibility for a customized installation,
+in particular to choose which Desktop Environment you will install.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>LIVE media: you can boot the media in a real Mageia system without
+installing it, to see what you will get after installation. The
+installation process is simpler, but you get lesser choices.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>Details are given in the next sections.</para>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>Media</title>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>Definition</title>
+
+ <para>Here, a medium (plural: media) is an ISO image file that allows you to
+install and/or update Mageia and by extension any physical support the ISO
+file is copied to.</para>
+
+ <para>You can find them <link
+ns4:href="http://www.mageia.org/en/downloads/">here</link>.</para>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>Classical installation media</title>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>Common features</title>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>These ISOs use the traditional installer called drakx.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>They are able to make a clean install or an update from previous releases.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>DVD</title>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Different media for architecture 32 or 64 bits.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Some tools are available in the Welcome screen: Rescue System, Memory Test,
+Hardware Detection Tool.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Each DVD contains many available desktop environments and languages.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>You'll be given the choice during the installation to add non free software.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>DVD dual arch</title>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Both architectures are present on the same medium, the choice is made
+automatically according to the detected CPU.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Uses Xfce desktop only.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Not all languages are available. (be, bg, ca, de, en, es, fr, it, mk, pl,
+pt, ru, sv, uk) TO BE CHECKED!</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>It contains non free software.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </section>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>Live media</title>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>Common features</title>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Can be used to preview the distribution without installing it on a HDD, and
+optionally install Mageia on to your HDD.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Each ISO contains only one desktop environment (KDE or GNOME).</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Different media for 32 or 64 bit architectures.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold">Live ISOs can only be used to create clean
+installations, they cannot be used to upgrade from previous
+releases.</emphasis></para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>They contain non free software.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>Live CD KDE</title>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>KDE desktop environment only.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>English language only.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>32 bit only.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>Live CD GNOME</title>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>GNOME desktop environment only.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>English language only.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>32 bit only.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>Live DVD KDE</title>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>KDE desktop environment only.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>All languages are present.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Different media for 32 or 64 bit architectures.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>Live DVD GNOME</title>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>GNOME desktop environment only.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>All languages are present.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Different media for 32 or 64 bit architectures.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </section>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>Boot-only CD media</title>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>Common features</title>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Each one is a small image that contains no more than that which is needed to
+start the drakx installer and find drakx-installer-stage2 and other packages
+that are needed to continue and complete the install. These packages may be
+on the PC hard disk, on a local drive, on a local network or on the
+Internet.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>These media are very light (less than 100 MB) and are convenient when
+bandwidth is too low to download a full DVD, a PC without a DVD drive or a
+PC that can't boot from a USB stick.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Different media for 32 or 64 bit architectures.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>English language only.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>boot.iso</title>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Contains only free software, for those people who refuse to use non-free
+software.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>boot-nonfree.iso</title>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Contains non-free software (mostly drivers, codecs...) for people who need
+it.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </section>
+ </section>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>Downloading and Checking Media</title>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>下载中</title>
+
+ <para>Once you have chosen your ISO file, you can download it using either http or
+BitTorrent. In both cases, a window gives you some information, such as the
+mirror in use and the possibility to change if the bandwidth is to low. If
+http is chosen, you may also see something like</para>
+
+ <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="Checking.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para>md5sum and sha1sum are tools to check the ISO integrity. Use only one of
+them. Keep one of them <link linkend="integrity">for further
+usage</link>. Then this window appears:</para>
+
+ <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="Download.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para>Check the radio button Save File.</para>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title xml:id="integrity">Checking the downloaded media integrity</title>
+
+ <para>Both checksums are hexadecimal numbers calculated by an algorithm from the
+file to be downloaded. When you ask these algorithms to recalculate this
+number from your downloaded file, either you have the same number and your
+downloaded file is correct, or the number is different and you have a
+failure. A failure infers that you should retry the download.</para>
+
+ <para>Open a console, no need to be root, and:</para>
+
+ <para>- To use md5sum, type: [sam@localhost]$ <userinput>md5sum
+path/to/the/image/file.iso</userinput>.</para>
+
+ <para>- To use sha1sum, type: [sam@localhost]$ <userinput>sha1sum
+path/to/the/image/file.iso</userinput>.</para>
+
+ <para>and compare the obtained number on your computer (you may have to wait for a
+while) with the number given by Mageia. Example:</para>
+
+ <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="../Md5sum.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para/>
+ </section>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>Burn or dump the ISO</title>
+
+ <para>The checked ISO can now be burned to a CD or DVD or dumped to a USB
+stick. These operations are not a simple copy and aim to make a boot-able
+medium.</para>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>将ISO文件刻录到CD或DVD</title>
+
+ <para>Use whatever burner you wish but ensure the burning device is set correctly
+to <emphasis role="bold">burn an image</emphasis>, burn data or files is not
+correct. There is more information in <link
+ns4:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Writing_CD_and_DVD_images">the Mageia
+wiki</link>.</para>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>Dump the ISO to a USB stick</title>
+
+ <para>All Mageia ISOs are hybrids, which means you can 'dump' them to a USB stick
+and then use it to boot and install the system.</para>
+
+ <warning>
+ <para>"dumping" an image onto a flash device destroys any previous file-system on
+the device; any other data will be lost and the partition capacity will be
+reduced to the image size.</para>
+ </warning>
+
+ <para>To recover the original capacity, you must redo partitioning and re-format
+the USB stick.</para>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>Using a graphical tool within Mageia</title>
+
+ <para>You can use a graphical tool like <link
+ns4:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/IsoDumper_Writing_ISO_images_on_USB_sticks">IsoDumper</link></para>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>Using a graphical tool within Windows</title>
+
+ <para>You could try:</para>
+
+ <para>- <link ns4:href="http://rufus.akeo.ie/?locale=en_US">Rufus</link> using the
+"ISO image" option;</para>
+
+ <para>- <link ns4:href="http://sourceforge.net/projects/win32diskimager">Win32
+Disk Imager</link></para>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>Using Command line within a GNU/Linux system</title>
+
+ <warning>
+ <para>It is potentially *dangerous* to do this by hand. You risk to overwrite a
+disc partition if you get the device-ID wrong.</para>
+ </warning>
+
+ <para>You can also use the dd tool in a console:</para>
+
+ <orderedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Open a console</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Become root with the command <userinput>su -</userinput> (don't forget the
+final '-' )</para>
+
+ <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="../Root.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Plug your USB stick (do not mount it, this also means do not open any
+application or file manager that could access or read it)</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Enter the command <userinput>fdisk -l</userinput></para>
+
+ <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="../Fdisk.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para>Alternatively, you can get the device name with the command
+<code>dmesg</code>: at end, you see the device name starting with
+<emphasis>sd</emphasis>, and <emphasis>sdd</emphasis> in this case:</para>
+
+ <screen>[72594.604531] usb 1-1: new high-speed USB device number 27 using xhci_hcd
+[72594.770528] usb 1-1: New USB device found, idVendor=8564, idProduct=1000
+[72594.770533] usb 1-1: New USB device strings: Mfr=1, Product=2, SerialNumber=3
+[72594.770536] usb 1-1: Product: Mass Storage Device
+[72594.770537] usb 1-1: Manufacturer: JetFlash
+[72594.770539] usb 1-1: SerialNumber: 18MJTWLMPUCC3SSB
+[72594.770713] usb 1-1: ep 0x81 - rounding interval to 128 microframes, ep desc says 255 microframes
+[72594.770719] usb 1-1: ep 0x2 - rounding interval to 128 microframes, ep desc says 255 microframes
+[72594.771122] usb-storage 1-1:1.0: USB Mass Storage device detected
+[72594.772447] scsi host8: usb-storage 1-1:1.0
+[72595.963238] scsi 8:0:0:0: Direct-Access JetFlash Transcend 2GB 1100 PQ: 0 ANSI: 4
+[72595.963626] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] 4194304 512-byte logical blocks: (2.14 GB/2.00 GiB)
+[72595.964104] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Write Protect is off
+[72595.964108] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Mode Sense: 43 00 00 00
+[72595.965025] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] No Caching mode page found
+[72595.965031] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Assuming drive cache: write through
+[72595.967251] <emphasis>sdd</emphasis>: sdd1
+[72595.969446] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Attached SCSI removable disk</screen>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Find the device name for your USB stick (by its size), for example
+<code>/dev/sdb</code> in the screenshot above, it is a 8GB USB stick.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Enter the command: # <userinput>dd if=path/to/the/ISO/file of=/dev/sdX
+bs=1M</userinput></para>
+
+ <para>Where X=your device name eg: /dev/sdc</para>
+
+ <para>Example: # <userinput>dd if=/home/user/Downloads/Mageia-4-x86_64-DVD.iso
+of=/dev/sdb bs=1M</userinput></para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Enter the command: # <userinput>sync</userinput></para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Unplug your USB stick, it is done</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </orderedlist>
+ </section>
+ </section>
+ </section>
+</section> \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/zh_CN/acceptLicense.xml b/docs/installer/zh_CN/acceptLicense.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..506698b6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/zh_CN/acceptLicense.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="acceptLicense" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_CN">
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ <info>
+ <!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 27 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- JohnR: minor mods 2012-3-30 -->
+<!-- SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back -->
+<!-- JohnR: 2012-04-05 - Inserted text from barjac with some modifications:
+ http://mtf.no-ip.co.uk/doc/help/license.html -->
+<!-- marja:2012-04-05 - having a look because this isn't a DocBook5.0 type anymore,
+ but text/xml. First changing centimetres in screenshot to pixels (
+ ), after that nested the two existing sections into a third one-->
+<!-- removed para id's, corrected duplicate id's for segments, marja, 20120409 -->
+<!-- barjac:2012-04-10 - edited header to correct formatting after my saves - not
+ sure what is causing the corruption -->
+<!-- JohnR 2012-04-19 language proofreading -->
+<title xml:id="acceptLicense-ti1">许可证和发行说明</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <mediaobject>
+<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata xml:id="acceptLicense-im1"
+revision="4" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="dx2-license.png"/>
+</imageobject> <imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="acceptLicense-im2"
+revision="5" align="center" condition="live" format="PNG"
+fileref="live-license.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <section xml:id="license">
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="license-ti1">许可协议</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <para>在安装 <application>Mageia</application> 之前,请先仔细阅读许可条款和许可条件。</para>
+
+ <para>这些许可条款和许可条件适用于整个 <application>Mageia</application> 发行版,你必须予以接受才能继续安装。</para>
+
+ <para>要接受, 只要选择 <guilabel>接受</guilabel> 后点击 <guibutton>下一步</guibutton>.</para>
+
+ <para>若你不希望接受这些条件,我们向您表示诚挚歉意。请点击 <guibutton>退出</guibutton> 来重启计算机。</para>
+
+
+ <!-- if you want two sections in a file, both need to be nested in a third section -
+ marja, 20120405 -->
+</section>
+
+ <section xml:id="releaseNotes">
+ <!--
+ <para>
+Release Notes</para>
+-->
+<info>
+ <title xml:id="releaseNotes-ti1">发行说明</title>
+ </info>
+
+
+
+ <para>有关此 Mageia 发布版本的重要信息,可以通过点击 <guibutton>发行说明</guibutton> 来阅读。</para>
+ </section>
+</section> \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/zh_CN/addUser.xml b/docs/installer/zh_CN/addUser.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..149f6e66
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/zh_CN/addUser.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,145 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="addUser" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_CN">
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="addUser-ti1">用户和管理员管理</title>
+ </info>
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ <mediaobject>
+<!-- Started by marja,using Led43's text, on 2012 03 27 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back -->
+<!-- removed para xml:id's, finished the page using Led43's text in the wiki, but
+ changed his text about the Advanced User Managment screen (the only thing
+ about guest account there, is the box you can tick or untick to enable or
+ disable it, the rest is about the normal user you're adding in the previous
+ screen), marja, 20120409-->
+<!-- barjac 2012-04-13 moved explanation of xguest lower down. I don't understand
+ "rbash" in the xguest warning - is that correct? -->
+<!-- JohnR 2012-04-19 Language proofreading -->
+<!-- marja 2012-04-24 Added screenshot -->
+<!-- marja 2013-04-26 added new note-->
+<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata revision="1" align="center"
+xml:id="setRootPassword-im1" fileref="dx2-setRootPassword.png"
+format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG"
+fileref="live-user1.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <section xml:id="root-password">
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="root-password-ti2">设置管理员(root账户)密码:</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <para>我们建议任何时候安装 <application>Mageia</application> 都设置一个超级用户或管理员密码(Linux 中一般叫做
+root
+密码)。当你在顶部输入框中输入密码时,盾的颜色将会从红色变为黄色、绿色,用以指示你所输入密码的强度。绿色表示你的密码强度较高。你需要在下方输入框中在此输入相同的密码,以确保你之前的密码没有输错。</para>
+
+ <note xml:id="givePassword">
+ <para>所有的密码都区分大小写。建议子啊密码中混合使用字母(大写和小写)、数字和其他字符。</para>
+ </note>
+ </section>
+
+ <section xml:id="enterUser">
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="enterUser-ti3">输入用户名</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <para>在这里添加一个用户。一个用户拥有比超级管理员更少的权限,但是网上冲浪,使用办公软件或者玩游戏等是足够的。</para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guibutton>图标</guibutton>:若点击此按钮,则会改变用户图标。</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>真实姓名</guilabel>:在文本框中输入用户的真名。</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>登录名</guilabel>:输入用户的登录名,或让 drakx
+根据真实姓名自动设置。<emphasis>登录名区分大小写。</emphasis></para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>密码</guilabel>:在此文本框中输入用户密码。后面的盾牌图标将会指示密码强度。(参见 <xref
+linkend="givePassword"/>)</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>密码(重复)</guilabel>:再输入依次用户密码。drakx 将会检查两次输入的密码是否一致。</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>任何在安装 Mageia 时添加的用户将拥有一个全局可读(但写保护)的主目录。</para>
+
+ <para>不过,在使用系统时,通过 <emphasis>Mageia 控制中心 - 系统
+-管理系统用户</emphasis>添加的用户将拥有其他用户不可读且不可写的主目录。</para>
+
+ <para>If you don't want a world readable home directory for anyone, it is advised
+to only add a temporary user now and to add the real one(s) after reboot.</para>
+
+ <para>If you prefer world readable home directories, you might want to add all
+extra needed users in the <emphasis>Configuration - Summary</emphasis> step
+during the install. Choose <emphasis>User management</emphasis>.</para>
+
+ <para>The access permissions can also be changed after the install.</para>
+ </note>
+ </section>
+
+ <section condition="classical" xml:id="addUserAdvanced">
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="addUserAdvanced-ti3">高级用户管理</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <para>If the <guibutton>advanced</guibutton> button is clicked you are offered a
+screen that allows you to edit the settings for the user you are adding.</para>
+
+ <para condition="classical">Additionally, you can disable or enable a guest account.</para>
+
+ <warning condition="classical">
+ <para>Anything a guest with a default <emphasis>rbash</emphasis> guest account
+saves to his /home directory will be erased when he logs out. The guest
+should save his important files to a USB key.</para>
+ </warning>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem condition="classical">
+ <para><guilabel>Enable guest account</guilabel>: Here you can enable or disable a
+guest account. The guest account allows a guest to log into and use the PC,
+but he has more restricted access than normal users.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Shell</guilabel>: This drop down list allows you to change the
+shell used by the user you are adding in the previous screen, options are
+Bash, Dash and Sh</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>User ID</guilabel>: Here you can set the user ID for the user you
+are adding in the previous screen. This is a number. Leave it blank unless
+you know what you are doing.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Group ID</guilabel>: This lets you set the group ID. Also a
+number, usually the same one as for the user. Leave it blank unless you know
+what you are doing.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </section>
+</section> \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/zh_CN/add_supplemental_media.xml b/docs/installer/zh_CN/add_supplemental_media.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7e56e250
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/zh_CN/add_supplemental_media.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_CN" xml:id="add_supplemental_media"
+ xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="add_supplemental_media-ti1">介质选择 (设置增补的安装介质)</title>
+ </info>
+
+
+
+
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!-- papoteur 2013-04-13 - created -->
+<!-- marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot and expanded title (because is was the same as for media_selection -->
+<!-- marja 2013-04-16 s/a optical/an optcal/ s/support/disc/ s/or or/or/ s/at/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center"
+fileref="dx2-add_supplemental_media.png" format="PNG" revision="1"
+xml:id="dx2-add_supplemental_media-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para>此窗口中列出了已识别的软件仓库。你可以添加其他的软件源,如光盘或远程资源。所选的源将决定下一步中哪些软件包可用于安装。</para>
+
+ <para>如果需要获取网络资源,请执行以下两步:</para>
+
+ <orderedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>若尚未启用网络链接,请选择并启用它。 </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Selecting a mirror or specifying a URL (very first entry). By selecting a
+mirror, you have access to the selection of all repositories managed by
+Mageia, like the Nonfree , the Tainted repositories and the Updates. With
+the URL, you can designate a specific repository or your own NFS
+installation.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </orderedlist>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>If you are updating a 64 bit installation which may contain some 32 bit
+packages, it is advised to use this screen to add an online mirror by
+ticking one of the Network protocols here. The 64 bit DVD iso only contains
+64 bit and noarch packages, it will not be able to update the 32 bit
+packages. However, after adding an online mirror, installer will find the
+needed 32 bit packages there.</para>
+ </note>
+
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/zh_CN/ask_mntpoint_s.xml b/docs/installer/zh_CN/ask_mntpoint_s.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..23f71d9a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/zh_CN/ask_mntpoint_s.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xml:id="ask_mntpoint_s" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_CN">
+
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="ask_mntpoint_s-ti1">选择挂载点</title>
+ </info>
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 28 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back -->
+<!-- removed para xml:id's, marja, 20120409 -->
+<!-- barjac 14/04/2012 Minor edit to improve grammar and replaced "at least ONE"
+ with "a", as I can't imagine having more than one root partition ;) -->
+<!-- Lebarhon : I put [] where it seems having mistakes -->
+<!-- Marja: you're right, in English English it is "its type", however, the Americans
+ write "it's type". And you're right about the redundant part, too, I removed it-->
+<!-- And JohnR says the Americans are WRONG! :-)) -->
+<!-- 2012-04-19 Language proofreading done -->
+<imageobject condition='classical'> <imagedata revision="1"
+fileref="dx2-chooseMountpoints.png" align="center" format="PNG"
+xml:id="chooseMountPoints-im1"></imagedata> </imageobject> <imageobject
+condition='live'> <imagedata revision="1"
+fileref="live-chooseMountpoints.png" align="center" format="PNG"
+xml:id="live-chooseMountPoints-im1"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para>Here you see the Linux partitions that have been found on your computer. If
+you don't agree with the <application>DrakX</application> suggestions, you
+can change the mount points.</para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>If you change anything, make sure you still have a <literal>/</literal>
+(root) partition.</para>
+ </note>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Every partition is shown as follows: "Device" ("Capacity", "Mount point",
+"Type").</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>"Device", is made up of: "hard drive", ["hard drive number"(letter)],
+"partition number" (for example, "sda5").</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>If you have many partitions, you can choose many different mount points from
+the drop down menu, such as <literal>/</literal>, <literal>/home</literal>
+and <literal>/var</literal>. You can even make your own mount points, for
+instance <literal>/video</literal> for a partition where you want to store
+your films, or <literal>/cauldron-home</literal> for the
+<literal>/home</literal> partition of a cauldron install.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>对于非必需的分区,挂载点一项可以留空。</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <warning>
+ <para>Choose <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> if you are not sure what to choose,
+and then tick <guilabel>Custom disk partitioning</guilabel>. In the screen
+that follows, you can click on a partition to see its type and size.</para>
+ </warning>
+
+ <para>If you are sure the mount points are correct, click on
+<guibutton>Next</guibutton>, and choose whether you only want to format the
+partition(s) DrakX suggests, or more.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/zh_CN/bestTime.xml b/docs/installer/zh_CN/bestTime.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c0ce65fb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/zh_CN/bestTime.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_CN" xml:id="bestTime"
+ xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="bestTime-ti1">时钟设置</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <mediaobject condition="live">
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="live-bestTime.png"
+format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="bestTime-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para>在这一步中,你需要选择内部时钟的计时方式(本地时间或 UTC 时间)。</para>
+
+ <para>在高级选项卡中,你可以找到更多有关时钟设置的选项。</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/zh_CN/bootLive.xml b/docs/installer/zh_CN/bootLive.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0da8c5a4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/zh_CN/bootLive.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,135 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="bootLive" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_CN">
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="bootLive-ti1">引导 Mageia Live 系统</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <section xml:id="bootLive-1">
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="bootLive1-ti1">引导媒体</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <section>
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="bootLive11-ti1">自磁盘</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <para>You can boot directly from the media you used to burn your image (CD-ROM,
+DVD-ROM...). You usually just need to insert it in your CD/DVD drive for the
+bootloader to launch the installation automatically after rebooting the
+computer. If that does not happen you may need to reconfigure your BIOS or
+press one key that will offer you to choose the peripheral from which the
+computer will boot.</para>
+
+ <para>According to which hardware you have, and how it is configured, you get
+either one or another of the two screens below.</para>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="bootLive12-ti1">自 USB 设备</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <para>You can boot from the USB device on which you dumped your image
+ISO. According to your BIOS settings, the computer boots perhaps directly on
+the USB device already plugged in a port. If that does not happen you may
+need to reconfigure your BIOS or press one key that will offer you to choose
+the peripheral from which the computer will boot.</para>
+ </section>
+ </section>
+
+ <section xml:id="biosmode">
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="biosmode-ti1">In BIOS/CSM/Legacy mode</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="live-bootCSM.png"/> </imageobject>
+
+ <caption>
+ <para>First screen while booting in BIOS mode</para>
+ </caption>
+ </mediaobject>
+
+ <para>In the middle menu, you have the choice between three actions:</para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Boot Mageia: That means Mageia 5 will start from the connected media (CD/DVD
+or USB stick) without writing anything on the disk, so expect a very slow
+system. Once the boot is done, you can proceed to the installation on a hard
+disk.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Install Mageia: This choice will directly install Mageia on a hard disk.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Boot from hard disk: This choice allows to boot from hard disk, as usual,
+when no media (CD/DVD or USB stick) is connected. (not working with Mageia
+5).</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>In the bottom menu, are the Boot Options:</para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>F1 - Help. Explain the options "splash", "apm", "acpi" and "Ide"</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>F2 - Language. Choose the display language of the screens.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>F3 - Screen resolution. Choose between text, 640x400, 800x600, 1024x728</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>F4 - CD-Rom. CD-Rom or Other. Normally, the installation is performed from
+the inserted installation medium. Here, select other sources, like FTP or
+NFS servers. If the installation is carried out in a network with an SLP
+server, select one of the installation sources available on the server with
+this option.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>F5 - Driver. Yes or No. The system is aware about the presence of an
+optional disk with a driver update and will require its insertion during
+installation process.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>F6 - Kernel options. This is a way to specify options according to your
+hardware and the drivers to use.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </section>
+
+ <section xml:id="uefimode">
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="uefimode-ti1">In UEFI mode</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <mediaobject condition="live">
+ <imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" align="center"
+fileref="live-bootUEFI.png" format="PNG" xml:id="bootUEFI-im1"/>
+</imageobject>
+
+ <caption>
+ <para>First screen while booting on UEFI system from disk</para>
+ </caption>
+ </mediaobject>
+
+ <para>You have only the choice to run Mageia in Live mode (first choice) or to
+process the installation (second choice).</para>
+ <para>If you booted from a USB stick, you get two supplemental lines which are a
+duplicata of the previous lines suffixed with "USB". You have to choose
+them.</para>
+
+ <para>In each case, the first steps will be the same to choose language, timezone
+and keyboard, then the processes differ, with <link
+linkend="testing">additional steps in Live mode</link>.</para>
+ </section>
+</section> \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/zh_CN/chooseDesktop.xml b/docs/installer/zh_CN/chooseDesktop.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..11f21d22
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/zh_CN/chooseDesktop.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_CN" xml:id="chooseDesktop">
+
+
+ <!--2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page-->
+<info>
+ <title xml:id="chooseDesktop-ti1">桌面环境选择</title>
+ </info>
+
+
+
+
+ <para>Depending on your selection here, you may be offered further screens to fine
+tune your choice.</para>
+
+ <para>After the selection step(s), you will see a slide show during package
+installation. The slide show can be disabled by pressing the
+<guilabel>Details</guilabel> button</para>
+
+
+
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-chooseDesktop.png" align="center"
+format="PNG" ></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para>Choose whether you prefer to use the <application>KDE</application> or
+<application>Gnome</application> desktop environment. Both come with a full
+set of useful applications and tools. Tick <guilabel>Custom</guilabel> if
+you want to use neither or both, or if you want something other than the
+default software choices for these desktop environments. The
+<application>LXDE</application> desktop is lighter than the previous two,
+sporting less eye candy and fewer packages installed by default.</para>
+ </section>
+
diff --git a/docs/installer/zh_CN/choosePackageGroups.xml b/docs/installer/zh_CN/choosePackageGroups.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e98059af
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/zh_CN/choosePackageGroups.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_CN" xml:id="choosePackageGroups">
+
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="choosePackageGroups-ti1">选择软件包组</title>
+ </info>
+
+
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!--2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page-->
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-choosePackageGroups.png"
+align="center" format="PNG" ></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para>Packages have been sorted into groups, to make choosing what you need on
+your system a lot easier. The groups are fairly self explanatory, however
+more information about the content of each is available in tool-tips which
+become visible as the mouse is hovered over them.</para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>工作区</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>服务器。</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>图形界面环境</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Individual Package Selection: You can use this option to manually add or
+remove packages.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ <para>Read <xref linkend="minimal-install"></xref> for instructions on how to do a
+minimal install (without or with X &amp; IceWM).</para>
+ </section>
+
diff --git a/docs/installer/zh_CN/choosePackagesTree.xml b/docs/installer/zh_CN/choosePackagesTree.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c506983c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/zh_CN/choosePackagesTree.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_CN" xml:id="choosePackagesTree">
+
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="choosePackagesTree-ti1">选择单个软件包</title>
+ </info>
+
+
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!--2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page-->
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-choosePackagesTree.png" align="center"
+format="PNG" ></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para>Here you can add or remove any extra packages to customise your
+installation.</para>
+
+ <para>After having made your choice, you can click on the <guibutton>floppy
+icon</guibutton> at the bottom of the page to save your choice of packages
+(saving to a USB key works, too). You can then use this file to install the
+same packages on another system, by pressing the same button during install
+and choosing to load it.</para>
+ </section>
+
diff --git a/docs/installer/zh_CN/configureServices.xml b/docs/installer/zh_CN/configureServices.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ad8152f8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/zh_CN/configureServices.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xml:id="configureServices" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_CN">
+
+
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="configureServices-ti1">配置服务</title>
+ </info>
+
+
+
+
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!-- 2012-12-25 marja - moved this section out of misc-params.xml -->
+<!-- 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-configureServices.png"
+align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="configureServices-im1"></imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="configureServices-pa1">Here you can set which services should (not) start when you boot your
+system.</para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="configureServices-pa2">There are four groups, click on the triangle before a group to expand it and
+see all services in it.</para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="configureServices-pa3">DrakX自动选择的设置通常可正常工作。</para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="configureServices-pa4">If you highlight a service, some information about it is shown in the info
+box below.</para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="configureServices-pa5">只有在您完全了解您的行为的风险后再作出改动。</para>
+ </section>
+
diff --git a/docs/installer/zh_CN/configureTimezoneUTC.xml b/docs/installer/zh_CN/configureTimezoneUTC.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ef194246
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/zh_CN/configureTimezoneUTC.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_CN" xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC">
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-ti6">配置时区</title>
+ </info>
+
+
+
+
+
+ <mediaobject>
+<!-- 2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml -->
+<!-- 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot -->
+<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata
+xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-im1" revision="1"
+fileref="dx2-configureTimezoneUTC.png" align="center" format="PNG"/>
+</imageobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="live-timeZone.png"
+condition="live" format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-pa1">Choose your time zone by choosing your country or a city close to you in the
+same time zone.</para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-pa2">In next screen you can choose to set your hardware clock to local time or to
+GMT, also known as UTC.</para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-pa3">If you have more than one operating system on your computer, make sure they
+are all set to local time, or all to UTC/GMT.</para>
+ </note>
+</section> \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/zh_CN/configureX_card_list.xml b/docs/installer/zh_CN/configureX_card_list.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..abc70b91
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/zh_CN/configureX_card_list.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_CN" xml:id="configureX_card_list">
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ <info>
+ <!-- Initiated by Marja 2012-08-08 -->
+<!-- Further text JohnR 2012-08-29 -->
+<!-- tproof -->
+<!-- lproof -->
+<!-- Done corrections accordind to tmb remarks. Papoteur -->
+<title xml:id="configureX_card_list-ti1">选择一个X服务器(配置您的显示卡)</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" align="center"
+xml:id="configureX_card_list-im1" fileref="dx2-configureX_card_list.png"
+format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para>DrakX has a very comprehensive database of video cards and will usually
+correctly identify your video device.</para>
+
+ <para>If the installer has not correctly detected your graphic card and you know
+which one you have, you can select it from the tree by: <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>vendor</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>then the name of your card</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>卡的类型</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist></para>
+
+ <para>If you cannot find your card in the vendor lists (because it's not yet in
+the database or it's an older card) you may find a suitable driver in the
+Xorg category</para>
+
+ <para>The Xorg listing provides more than 40 generic and open source video card
+drivers. If you still can't find a named driver for your card there is the
+option of using the vesa driver which provides basic capabilities.</para>
+
+ <para>Be aware that if you select an incompatible driver you may only have access
+to the Commandline Interface.</para>
+
+ <para>Some video card manufacturers provide proprietary drivers for Linux which
+may only be available in the Nonfree repository and in some cases only from
+the card manufacturers' websites.</para>
+
+ <para>The Nonfree repository needs to be explicitly enabled to access them. If
+you didn't select it previously, you should do this after your first reboot.</para>
+</section> \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/zh_CN/configureX_chooser.xml b/docs/installer/zh_CN/configureX_chooser.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8cf4bced
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/zh_CN/configureX_chooser.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="configureX_chooser" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_CN">
+
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="configureX_chooser-ti1">显示卡和显示器配置</title>
+ </info>
+
+
+
+ <mediaobject>
+<!-- Marja 2012-08-10, copied setupX.xml to this file and replaced all "setupX" in the code by "configureX_chooser", because this is the correct filename for this page-->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-configureX_chooser.png"
+align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="configureX_chooser-im1"> </imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa1">No matter which graphical environment (also known as desktop environment)
+you chose for this install of <application>Mageia</application>, they are
+all based on a graphical user interface system called <acronym>X Window
+System</acronym>, or simply <acronym>X</acronym>. So in order for
+<acronym>KDE</acronym>, <acronym>Gnome</acronym>, <acronym>LXDE</acronym> or
+any other graphical environment to work well, the following
+<acronym>X</acronym> settings need to be correct. Choose the correct
+settings if you can see that <application>DrakX</application> didn't make a
+choice, or if you think the choice is incorrect.</para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa2"><emphasis><guibutton>Graphic card</guibutton></emphasis>: Choose your card
+from the list if needed.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa3"><emphasis><guibutton>Monitor</guibutton></emphasis>: You can choose
+<guilabel>Plug'n Play</guilabel> when applicable, or choose your monitor
+from the <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> or <guilabel>Generic</guilabel>
+list. Choose <guilabel>Custom</guilabel> if you prefer to manually set the
+horizontal and vertical refresh rates of your monitor.</para>
+
+ <warning>
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa3a">不正确的刷新率可能会损坏显示器</para>
+ </warning>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa4"><emphasis><guibutton>Resolution</guibutton></emphasis>: Set the desired
+resolution and color depth of your monitor here.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa5"><emphasis><guibutton>Test</guibutton></emphasis>: The test button does not
+always appear during install. If the button is there, you can control your
+settings by pressing it. If you see a question asking you whether your
+settings are correct, you can answer "yes", and the settings will be
+kept. If you don't see anything, you'll return to the configuration screen
+and be able to reconfigure everything until the test is good. <emphasis>Make
+sure your settings are on the safe side if the test button isn't
+available</emphasis></para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa6"><emphasis><guibutton>Options</guibutton></emphasis>: Here you can choose to
+enable or disable various options.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/zh_CN/configureX_monitor.xml b/docs/installer/zh_CN/configureX_monitor.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3bf18816
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/zh_CN/configureX_monitor.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,83 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_CN" xml:id="configureX_monitor"
+ xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ <info>
+ <!-- Initiated by Marga 2012-8-09 -->
+<!-- Further text JohnR 2012-08-30 -->
+<!-- tproof -->
+<!-- lproof -->
+<title xml:id="configureX_monitor-ti1">选择您的显示器</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa1">DrakX has a very comprehensive database of monitors and will usually
+correctly identify yours.</para>
+
+ <warning>
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa1w"><emphasis>Selecting a monitor with different characteristics could damage
+your monitor or video hardware. Please don't try something without knowing
+what you are doing.</emphasis> If in doubt you should consult your monitor
+documentation</para>
+ </warning>
+
+ <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-configureX_monitor.png"
+format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para revision="1"
+ xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa2"><emphasis>自定义</emphasis></para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa3">This option allows you to set two critical parameters, the vertical refresh
+rate and the horizontal sync rate. Vertical refresh determines how often the
+screen is refreshed and horizontal sync is the rate at which scan lines are
+displayed.</para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa4">It is <emphasis>VERY IMPORTANT</emphasis> that you do not specify a monitor
+type with a sync range that is beyond the capabilities of your monitor: you
+may damage your monitor. If in doubt, choose a conservative setting and
+consult your monitor documentation.</para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa5"><emphasis>即插即用</emphasis></para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa6">This is the default option and tries to determine the monitor type from the
+monitor database.</para>
+
+ <para revision="1"
+ xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa7"><emphasis>供应商</emphasis></para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa8">If the installer has not correctly detected your monitor and you know which
+one you have, you can select it from the tree by selecting: <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>vendor</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>显示器制造商名称</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>显示器描述</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist></para>
+
+ <para revision="1"
+ xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa9"><emphasis>通用</emphasis></para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa10">selecting this group displays nearly 30 display configurations such as
+1024x768 @ 60Hz and includes Flat panel displays as used in laptops. This is
+often a good monitor selection group if you need to use the Vesa card driver
+when your video hardware cannot be determined automatically. Once again it
+may be wise to be conservative in your selections.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/zh_CN/diskdrake.xml b/docs/installer/zh_CN/diskdrake.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8d1948a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/zh_CN/diskdrake.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_CN" xml:id="diskdrake">
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ <info>
+ <!-- Started by marja on 2012 03 29 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE WRITTEN AND THEN REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- JohnR added note for bug 133 re encrypted partitions -->
+<!-- JohnR 2012-04-10 - tidy up module formatting -->
+<!-- Marja, 2012-04-18 changed "If you wish to use encryption on
+ any of your partitions" into "If you wish to use encryption on
+ your <literal>
+/</literal> partition" because pterjan said this is only for root
+ Also added some text. -->
+<!--marja 20120418 moved section end tag down to where it belongs-->
+<!--marja 20120418 added para 6a-->
+<title xml:id="diskdrake-ti1">Custom disk partitioning with DiskDrake</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <mediaobject>
+<imageobject condition='classical'> <imagedata fileref="dx2-diskdrake.png"
+align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition='live' > <imagedata
+fileref="live-diskdrake.png" align="center"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <warning>
+ <para revision="3" xml:id="diskdrake-pa1">If you wish to use encryption on your <literal>/</literal> partition you
+must ensure that you have a separate <literal>/boot</literal> partition. The
+encryption option for the <literal>/boot</literal> partition must NOT be
+set, otherwise your system will be unbootable.</para>
+ </warning>
+
+ <para revision="2" xml:id="diskdrake-pa3">Adjust the layout of your disk(s) here. You can remove or create
+partitions, change the filesystem of a partition or change its size and even
+view what is in them before you start.</para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake-pa4">There is a tab for every detected hard disk or other storage device, like an
+USB key. For example sda, sdb and sdc if there are three of them.</para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake-pa5">Push <guibutton>Clear all</guibutton> to wipe all partitions on the selected
+storage device</para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake-pa6">For all other actions: click on the desired partition first. Then view it,
+or choose a filesystem and a mount point, resize it or wipe it.</para>
+
+ <para xml:id="diskdrake-pa6a" revision="1">Continue until you adjusted everything to your wishes.</para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake-pa7"> 准备好时点击<guibutton>完成</guibutton>按钮。</para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>If you are installing Mageia on an UEFI system, check that an ESP (EFI
+System Partition) is present and correctly mounted on /boot/EFI (see above)</para>
+
+ <para><mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-diskdrake2.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject></para>
+ </note>
+</section> \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/zh_CN/doPartitionDisks.xml b/docs/installer/zh_CN/doPartitionDisks.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e407fcfc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/zh_CN/doPartitionDisks.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,141 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_CN" xml:id="doPartitionDisks">
+
+
+
+
+ <info>
+ <!---->
+<!-- lebarhon 2015-07-03 Suggested updates for Mageia 5 -->
+<title xml:id="doPartitionDisks-ti1">分区</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa1">In this screen you can see the content of your hard drive(s) and see the
+solutions the DrakX partitioning wizard found for where to install
+<application>Mageia</application>.</para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa2">The options available from the list below will vary depending on your
+particular hard drive(s) layout and content.</para>
+
+ <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-doPartitionDisks.png"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa3"><itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa4">使用现存的分区</para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa5">If this option is available, then existing Linux compatible partitions have
+been found and may be used for the installation.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa6">使用空闲空间</para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa7">If you have unused space on your hard drive then this option will use it for
+your new Mageia installation.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa8">Use Free Space on a Windows Partition</para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa9">If you have unused space on an existing Windows partition, the installer may
+offer to use it.</para>
+
+ <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa10" revision="2">This can be a useful way of making room for your new Mageia installation,
+but is a risky operation so you should make sure you have backed up all
+important files!</para>
+
+ <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa11" revision="3">Note that this involves shrinking the size of the Windows partition. The
+partition must be "clean", meaning that Windows must have closed down
+correctly the last time it was used. It must also have been defragmented,
+although this is not a guarantee that all files in the partition have been
+moved out of the area that is about to be used. It is highly recommended to
+back up your personal files.</para>
+
+ <para>With this option, the installer displays the remaining Windows partition in
+light blue and the future Mageia partition in dark blue with their intended
+sizes just under. You have the possibility to adapt these sizes by clicking
+and dragging the gap between both partitions. See the screen-shot below.</para>
+
+ <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-doPartitionDisks2.png"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist> <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa12">Erase and use Entire Disk.</para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa13">This option will use the complete drive for Mageia.</para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa14">Note! This will erase ALL data on the selected hard drive. Take care!</para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa15">If you intend to use part of the disk for something else, or you already
+have data on the drive that you are not prepared to lose, then do not use
+this option.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist><itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa16">自定义</para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa17">This gives you complete control over the placing of the installation on your
+hard drive(s).</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist></para>
+
+ <para><emphasis role="bold">Partitions sizing:</emphasis></para>
+
+ <para>The installer will share the available place out according to the following
+rules:</para>
+
+ <para><itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>If the total available place is lower than 50 GB, only one partition is
+created for /, there is no separate partition for /home.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>If the total available place is over 50 GB, then three partitions are
+created</para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>6/19 of the total available place is allocated to / with a maximum of 50 GB</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>1/19 is allocated to swap with a maximum of 4 GB</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>the rest (at least 12/19) is allocated to /home</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist></para>
+
+ <para>That means that from 160 GB and over of available place, the installer will
+create three partitions: 50 GB for /, 4 GB for swap and the rest for /home.</para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>If you are using an UEFI system, the ESP (EFI System Partition) will be
+automatically detected, or created if it does not exist yet, and mounted on
+/boot/EFI. The "Custom" option is the only one that allows to check it has
+been correctly done</para>
+ </note>
+
+ <warning>
+ <para>Some newer drives are now using 4096 byte logical sectors, instead of the
+previous standard of 512 byte logical sectors. Due to lack of available
+hardware, the partitioning tool used in the installer has not been tested
+with such a drive. Also some ssd drives now use an erase block size over 1
+MB. We suggest to pre-partition the drive, using an alternative partitioning
+tool like gparted, if you own such a device, and to use the following
+settings:</para>
+
+ <para>"Align to" "MiB"</para>
+
+ <para>"Free space preceding (MiB)" "2"</para>
+
+ <para>Also make sure all partitions are created with an even number of megabytes.</para>
+ </warning>
+</section> \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/zh_CN/exitInstall.xml b/docs/installer/zh_CN/exitInstall.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8f4a6983
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/zh_CN/exitInstall.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="exitInstall" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_CN">
+
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="exitInstall-ti1">恭喜</title>
+ </info>
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ <mediaobject>
+<!-- Started by marja on 2012 03 29 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE WRITTEN AND THEN REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- marja - 2012-04-24 added screenshot and text -->
+<!-- same day, added "s" to "sytems"-->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-exitInstall.png"
+format="PNG" align="center" xml:id="exitInstall-im1"> </imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para revision="2" xml:id="exitInstall-pa1">You have finished installing and configuring
+<application>Mageia</application> and it is now safe to remove the
+installation medium and reboot your computer.</para>
+
+ <para revision="2" xml:id="exitInstall-pa2">After reboot, in the bootloader screen, you can choose between the operating
+systems on your computer (if you have more than one).</para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="exitInstall-pa3">If you didn't adjust the settings for the bootloader, your Mageia install
+will be automatically selected and started. </para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="exitInstall-pa4">Enjoy!</para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="exitInstall-pa5">Visit www.mageia.org if you have any questions or want to contribute to
+Mageia </para>
+
+
+</section> \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/zh_CN/formatPartitions.xml b/docs/installer/zh_CN/formatPartitions.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e9d86c16
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/zh_CN/formatPartitions.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_CN" xml:id="formatPartitions">
+
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="formatPartitions-ti1">Formatting</title>
+ </info>
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ <mediaobject>
+<!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 29 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot -->
+<!-- marja 2012-04-24 added emphasis tags in formatPartitions-pa1 -->
+<imageobject condition='classical'> <imagedata revision="1"
+fileref="dx2-formatPartitions.png" format="PNG" align="center"
+xml:id="formatPartitions-im1"> </imagedata> </imageobject> <imageobject
+condition='live'> <imagedata revision="1"
+fileref="live-formatPartitions.png" format="PNG" align="center"
+xml:id="live-formatPartitions-im1"> </imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para revision="2" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa1">Here you can choose which partition(s) you wish to format. Any data on
+partitions <emphasis>not</emphasis> marked for formatting will be saved.</para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa2">Usually at least the partitions DrakX selected, need to be formatted</para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa3">Click on <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> to choose partitions you want to
+check for so called <emphasis>bad blocks</emphasis></para>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa4">If you're not sure you have made the right choice, you can click on
+<guibutton>Previous</guibutton>, again on <guibutton>Previous</guibutton>
+and then on <guibutton>Custom</guibutton> to get back to the main screen.
+In that screen you can choose to view what is in your partitions.</para>
+ </tip>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa5">When you are confident about the selection, click on
+<guibutton>Next</guibutton> to continue.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/zh_CN/installUpdates.xml b/docs/installer/zh_CN/installUpdates.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..db6218af
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/zh_CN/installUpdates.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_CN" xml:id="installUpdates"><info><title xml:id="installUpdates-ti1">更新</title></info>
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ <mediaobject>
+<!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 30 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- marja 20120418 removed xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"" from section tag, trying to restore correct html filename-->
+<!-- marja, 2012-04-24 added screenshot -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-installUpdates.png"
+format="PNG" align="center" xml:id="installUpdates-im1"></imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="installUpdates-pa1">Since this version of <application>Mageia</application> was released, some
+packages will have been updated or improved.</para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="installUpdates-pa2">Choose <guilabel>yes</guilabel> if you wish to download and install them,
+select <guilabel>no</guilabel> if you don't want to do this now, or if you
+aren't connected to the Internet</para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="installUpdates-pa3">Then press <guibutton>Next</guibutton> to continue</para>
+
+</section>
+ \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/zh_CN/installer.xml b/docs/installer/zh_CN/installer.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..58548add
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/zh_CN/installer.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,270 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="installer" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_CN">
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ <info>
+ <!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 30, using barjac's text -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!--removed para id's, corrected duplicate id's for segments, marja, 20120409 -->
+<!--barjac 2012-04-11 - corrected link to Welcome screen and unmangled header -
+ seems to be corrupted by xxe addon when saving -->
+<!-- JohnR - apparent corruption is caused by the positioning of this comment block
+ - corrected Lebarhon : I put [] where it seems having mistakes -->
+<!-- barjac 18/04/2012 Commented out para relating to peripherals, as it's apparently wrong -->
+<title xml:id="installer-ti1">DrakX, the Mageia Installer</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <para>Whether you are new to GNU-Linux or an experienced user, the Mageia
+Installer is designed to help make your installation or upgrade as easy as
+possible.</para>
+
+
+
+ <!-- <para>
+If you have peripherals like printers or scanners, it is [best] to
+ connect them and make sure they are powered up during installation. These
+ will be automatically detected and configured.</para> -->
+<para>The initial menu screen has various options, however the default one will
+start the installer, which will normally be all that you will need.</para>
+
+ <figure xml:id="dx-welcome">
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="installer-ti2">Installation Welcome Screen</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <para>Here are the default welcome screens when using a Mageia DVD, The first one
+with a legacy system and the second one with an UEFI system:
+ </para>
+
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="BId-drakx-intro-im1" revision="1"
+align="center" format="PNG" fileref="../dx-welcome.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject></figure>
+
+ <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx-welcome2.png" align="center"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para>From this first screen, it is possible to set some personal preferences:</para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The language (for the installation only, may be different that the chosen
+language for the system) by pressing the key F2 (Legacy mode only)</para>
+
+ <para/>
+
+ <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx-welcome-lang.png" align="center"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para>Use the arrow keys to select the language and press the key Enter.</para>
+
+ <para>Here is for example, the French welcome screen when using a Live
+DVD/CD. Note that the Live DVD/CD menu does not propose: <guilabel>Rescue
+System</guilabel>, <guilabel>Memory test</guilabel> and <guilabel>Hardware
+Detection Tool</guilabel>.</para>
+
+ <para/>
+
+ <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx-welcome4fr.png" align="center"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para/>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Change the screen resolution by pressing the F3 key (Legacy mode only).</para>
+
+ <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx-welcome5def.png" align="center"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Add some kernel options by pressing the <emphasis role="bold">F6</emphasis>
+key for the legacy mode or the <emphasis role="bold">e</emphasis> key for
+the UEFI mode.</para>
+
+ <para>If the installation fails, then it may be necessary to try again using one
+of the extra options. The menu called by F6 displays a new line called
+<guilabel>Boot options</guilabel> and propose four entries:</para>
+
+ <para>- Default, it doesn't alter anything in the default options.</para>
+
+ <para>- Safe Settings, priority is given to the safer options to the detriment of
+performances.</para>
+
+ <para>- No ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface), power management
+isn't taken into account.</para>
+
+ <para>- No Local APIC (Local Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller), it is
+about CPU interruptions, select this option if you are asked for.</para>
+
+ <para>When you select one of these entries, it modifies the default options
+displayed in the <guilabel>Boot Options</guilabel> line.</para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>In some Mageia releases, it may happen that the entries selected with the
+key F6 does not appear in the <guilabel>Boot Options</guilabel> line,
+however, they are really taken into account.</para>
+ </note>
+
+ <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-welcome6opt.png"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Add more kernel options by pressing the key F1 (Legacy mode only).</para>
+
+ <para>Pressing F1 opens a new window with more available options. Select one with
+the arrow keys and press Enter to have more details or press the Esc key to
+go back to the welcome screen.</para>
+
+ <para/>
+
+ <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx-welcomeHelp1.png" align="center"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para/>
+
+ <para>The detailed view about the option splash. Press Esc or select
+<guilabel>Return to Boot Options</guilabel> to go back to the options
+list. These options can by added by hand in the <guilabel>Boot
+options</guilabel> line.</para>
+
+ <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-welcomeHelp2.png"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para/>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>The help is translated in the chosen language with the F2 key.</para>
+ </note>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>For more information about kernel options on legacy and UEFI systems, see:
+<link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/How_to_set_up_kernel_options">https://wiki.mageia.org/en/How_to_set_up_kernel_options</link></para>
+
+ <para>Here is the default welcome screen when using a Wired Network-based
+Installation CD (Boot.iso or Boot-Nonfree.iso images):</para>
+
+ <para>It does not allow to change the language, the available options are
+described in the screen. For more information about using a Wired
+Network-based Installation CD, see <link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Boot.iso_install">the Mageia
+Wiki</link></para>
+
+ <warning>
+ <para>The keyboard layout is the American one.</para>
+ </warning>
+
+ <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="installer-im2" align="center"
+format="PNG" fileref="../dx-help.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <section xml:id="installationSteps">
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="installationSteps-ti1">安装步骤</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <para>The install process is divided into a number of steps, which can be followed
+on the side panel of the screen.</para>
+
+ <para>Each step has one or more screens which may also have
+<guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> buttons with extra, less commonly required,
+options.</para>
+
+ <para>Most screens have <guibutton>Help</guibutton> buttons which give further
+explanations about the current step.</para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>If somewhere during install you decide to stop the installation, it is
+possible to reboot, but please think twice before you do this. Once a
+partition has been formatted or updates have started to be installed, your
+computer is no longer in the same state and rebooting it could very well
+leave you with an unusable system. If in spite of this you are very sure
+rebooting is what you want, go to a text terminal by pressing the three keys
+<guibutton>Alt Ctrl F2</guibutton> at the same time. After that, press
+<guibutton>Alt Ctrl Delete</guibutton> simultaneously to reboot.</para>
+ </note>
+ </section>
+
+ <section xml:id="installationProblems">
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="installationProblems-ti1">安装问题和问题解决方案</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <section xml:id="noX">
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="noX-ti2">不使用图形界面</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>After the initial screen you did not reach the language selection
+screen. This can happen with some graphic cards and older systems. Try using
+low resolution by typing <code>vgalo</code> at the prompt.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para revision="2">If the hardware is very old, a graphical installation may not be
+possible. In this case it is worth trying a text mode installation. To use
+this hit ESC at the first welcome screen and confirm with ENTER. You will be
+presented with a black screen with the word "boot:". Type "text" and hit
+ENTER. Now continue with the installation in text mode.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </section>
+
+ <section xml:id="installFreezes">
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="installFreezes-ti1">The Install Freezes</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <para>If the system appeared to freeze during the installation, this may be a
+problem with hardware detection. In this case the automatic detection of
+hardware may be bypassed and dealt with later. To try this, type
+<code>noauto</code> at the prompt. This option may also be combined with
+other options as necessary.</para>
+ </section>
+
+ <section xml:id="kernelOptions">
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="kernelOptions-ti1">内存问题</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <para>These will rarely be needed, but in some cases the hardware may report the
+available RAM incorrectly. To specify this manually, you can use the
+<code>mem=xxxM</code> parameter, where xxx is the correct amount of
+RAM. e.g. <code>mem=256M</code> would specify 256MB of RAM.</para>
+ </section>
+
+ <section xml:id="DynamicPartitions">
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="DynamicPartitions-ti1">Dynamic partitions</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <para>If you converted your hard disk from "basic" format to "dynamic" format on
+Microsoft Windows, you must know that it is impossible to install Mageia on
+this disc. To go back to a basic disk, see the Microsoft documentation:
+<link
+ns2:href="http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc776315.aspx">http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc776315.aspx</link>.</para>
+ </section>
+ </section>
+</section>
+
diff --git a/docs/installer/zh_CN/login.xml b/docs/installer/zh_CN/login.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..9a9f1e63
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/zh_CN/login.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="login" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_CN">
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="label-to-adapt-ti1">Login screen</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <mediaobject condition="live">
+ <imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" align="center" xml:id="login-im1"
+format="PNG" fileref="live-login.png"/> </imageobject>
+
+ <caption>
+ <para>KDM login screen</para>
+ </caption>
+ </mediaobject>
+
+ <para>Finally, you will come to the login screen.</para>
+
+ <para>Enter your user name and user password, and in a few seconds you will find
+yourself with a loaded KDE or GNOME desktop, depending on which live medium
+you used. You can now start using your Mageia installation.</para>
+
+ <para>You can find another part of our documentation in <link
+linkend="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Category:Documentation">the Mageia
+wiki</link>.</para>
+</section> \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/zh_CN/media_selection.xml b/docs/installer/zh_CN/media_selection.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..59fa6f49
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/zh_CN/media_selection.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="media_selection" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_CN">
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="media_selection-ti1">介质选择 (Nonfree)</title>
+ </info>
+
+
+
+
+
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!-- papoteur 2013-04-11 - created -->
+<!-- marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot + made title longer (because it was the same as for add_supplemental_media)-->
+<!-- marja 2013-04-16 s/in/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell -->
+<!--marja 2013-04-17 s/xml:id="media-selection"/xml:id="media_selection"/ (html filename was wrong)-->
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-media_selection.png"
+format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="media_selection-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para>Here you have the list of available repositories. Not all repositories are
+available, according to which media you use for installing. The repositories
+selection determines which packages will be available for selection during
+the next steps.</para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The <emphasis>Core</emphasis> repository cannot be disabled as it contains
+the base of the distribution.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The <emphasis>Nonfree</emphasis> repository includes packages that are
+free-of-charge, i.e. Mageia may redistribute them, but they contain
+closed-source software (hence the name - Nonfree). For example this
+repository includes nVidia and ATI graphics card proprietary drivers,
+firmware for various WiFi cards, etc.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The <emphasis>Tainted</emphasis> repository includes packages released under
+a free license. The main criteria for placing packages in this repository is
+that they may infringe patents and copyright laws in some countries,
+e.g. Multimedia codecs needed to play various audio/video files; packages
+needed to play commercial video DVD, etc.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+</section> \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/zh_CN/minimal-install.xml b/docs/installer/zh_CN/minimal-install.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b89e4db5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/zh_CN/minimal-install.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_CN" xml:id="minimal-install"
+ xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+
+ <!--2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to
+ start a new page-->
+<!--2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot and s/next/related/ -->
+<info>
+ <title xml:id="minimal-install-ti1">最小安装</title>
+ </info>
+
+
+
+
+ <para>You can choose a Minimal Installation by de-selecting everything in the
+Package Group Selection screen, see <xref
+linkend="choosePackageGroups"></xref>.</para>
+ <para>If desired, you can additionally tick the "Individual package selection"
+option in the same screen.</para>
+ <para>Minimal Installation is intended for those with specific uses in mind for
+their <application>Mageia</application>, such as a server or a specialised
+workstation. You will probably use this option combined with the "Individual
+package selection" option mentioned above, to fine-tune your installation,
+see <xref linkend="choosePackagesTree"></xref>.</para>
+ <para>If you choose this installation class, then the related screen will offer
+you a few useful extras to install, such as documentation and X.</para>
+ <para>If selected, "With X" will also include IceWM as lightweight desktop
+environment.</para>
+ <para>The basic documentation is provided in the form of man and info pages. It
+contains the man pages from the <link
+xlink:href="http://www.tldp.org/manpages/man.html">Linux Documentation
+Project</link> and the <link
+xlink:href="http://www.gnu.org/software/coreutils/manual/">GNU
+coreutils</link> info pages.</para>
+
+ <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-minimal-install.png"
+align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="minimal-install-im1"></imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ </section>
+
diff --git a/docs/installer/zh_CN/misc-params.xml b/docs/installer/zh_CN/misc-params.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3fa6e2c4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/zh_CN/misc-params.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,210 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="misc-params" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_CN">
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="misc-params-ti1">Summary of miscellaneous parameters</title>
+ </info>
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ <mediaobject>
+<!-- Started by marja on 2012 03 31 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE WRITTEN AND REVIEWED! -->
+<!--marja - 2012 04 15 added some text, not much, unfortunately :( -->
+<!--marja 2012-04-24 added screenshots -->
+<!--JohnR 2012-04-25 Added text as requested by Psec :-)-->
+<!--marja 2012-04-24 added 2 links to other help pages -->
+<!--marja 2012-04-24 added some text in the drakxid-configureServices and
+ the drakxid-miscellaneous section -->
+<!--marja 2012-04-24 corrected "Magaia" in the last paragraph -->
+<!--marja 2012-04-24 corrected para xml:id number in the last paragraph -->
+<!-- 2012-05-01 marja - added You-Cheng Hsieh's section about IBus etc. -->
+<!-- 2012-08-09 marja - replaced linkend="setupBootloaderBeginner" by linkend="setupBootloader" -->
+<!--2012-12-25 marja - moved configureTimezoneUTC, selectCountry, configureServices and SecurityLevel out to separate files-->
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-summary.png" revision="1"
+align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="summary-im1" /> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-pa1">DrakX made smart choices for the configuration of your system depending on
+the choices you made and on the hardware DrakX detected. You can check the
+settings here and change them if you want after pressing
+<guibutton>Configure</guibutton>.</para>
+
+ <section xml:id="misc-params-system">
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="misc-params-system-ti2">系统参数</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa2" revision="1"><guilabel>时区</guilabel></para>
+
+ <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa2a" revision="1">DrakX selected a time zone for you, depending on your preferred
+language. You can change it if needed. See also <xref
+linkend="configureTimezoneUTC"/></para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa3" revision="1"><guilabel>国家/地区</guilabel></para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa3a">If you are not in the selected country, it is very important that you
+correct the setting. See <xref linkend="selectCountry"/></para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4" revision="1"><guilabel>Bootloader</guilabel></para>
+
+ <para revision="2" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4a">DrakX has made good choices for the bootloader setting.</para>
+
+ <para revision="2" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4b">Do not change anything, unless you know how to configure Grub and/or Lilo</para>
+
+ <para revision="2" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4c">For more information, see <xref linkend="setupBootloader"/></para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa5"><guilabel>用户管理</guilabel></para>
+
+ <para revision="2" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa5a">You can add extra users here. They will each get their own
+<literal>/home</literal> directories.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa6"><guilabel>服务</guilabel>:</para>
+
+ <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa6a" revision="1">System services refer to those small programs which run the background
+(daemons). This tool allows you to enable or disable certain tasks.</para>
+
+ <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa6b" revision="1">You should check carefully before changing anything here - a mistake may
+prevent your computer from operating correctly.</para>
+
+ <para>For more information, see <xref linkend="configureServices"/></para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </section>
+
+ <section xml:id="misc-params-hardware">
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="misc-params-hardware-ti3">硬件参数</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa1"><guilabel>键盘</guilabel>:</para>
+
+ <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa1a" revision="1">This is where you setup or change your keyboard layout which will depend on
+your location, language or type of keyboard.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa2"><guilabel>鼠标</guilabel>:</para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa2a">Here you can add or configure other pointing devices, tablets, trackballs
+etc.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa3"><guilabel>声卡</guilabel>:</para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa3a">The installer uses the default driver, if there is a default one. The option
+to select a different driver is only given when there is more than one
+driver for your card, but none of them is the default one.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa4" revision="1"><guilabel>图形界面</guilabel>:</para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa4a">This section allows you to configure your graphic card(s) and displays.</para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa4b">更多信息,参见 <xref linkend="configureX_chooser"/>.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="summaryBottom-im1" revision="1"
+align="center" format="PNG" fileref="dx2-summaryBottom.png" />
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+ </section>
+
+ <section xml:id="misc-params-network">
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="misc-params-network-ti4">网络和 Internet 参数</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-network-pa1"><guilabel>网络</guilabel>:</para>
+
+ <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa2" revision="1">You can configure your network here, but for network cards with non-free
+drivers it is better to do that after reboot, in the <application>Mageia
+Control Center</application>, if you have not yet enabled the Nonfree media
+repositories.</para>
+
+ <warning>
+ <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa3" revision="1">When you add a network card, do not forget to set your firewall to watch
+that interface as well.</para>
+ </warning>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa4" revision="1"><guilabel>Proxies</guilabel>:</para>
+
+ <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa4a" revision="1">A Proxy Server acts as an intermediary between your computer and the wider
+internet. This section allows you to configure your computer to utilize a
+proxy service.</para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-network-pa4b">You may need to consult your systems administrator to get the parameters you
+need to enter here</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </section>
+
+ <section xml:id="misc-params-security">
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="misc-params-security-ti5">安全</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para xml:id="misc-params-security-pa1" revision="1"><guilabel>Security Level</guilabel>:</para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-security-pa1a">Here you set the Security level for your computer, in most cases the default
+setting (Standard) is adequate for general use.</para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-security-pa1b">Check the option which best suits your usage.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para xml:id="misc-params-security-pa2" revision="1"><guilabel>Firewall</guilabel>:</para>
+
+ <para xml:id="misc-params-security-pa2a" revision="1">A firewall is intended to be a barrier between your important data and the
+rascals out there on the internet who would compromise or steal it.</para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-security-pa2b">Select the services that you wish to have access to your system. Your
+selections will depend on what you use your computer for.</para>
+
+ <warning>
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-security-pa2c">Bear in mind that allowing everything (no firewall) may be very risky.</para>
+ </warning>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/zh_CN/reboot.xml b/docs/installer/zh_CN/reboot.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..34853c22
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/zh_CN/reboot.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_CN" xml:id="reboot" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="reboot-ti1">重新启动</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <mediaobject condition="live">
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="live-reboot.png"
+format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="reboot-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para>Once the bootloader has been installed, you will be prompted to halt your
+computer, remove the live CD and restart the computer. When you restart, you
+will see a succession of download progress bars. These indicate that the
+software media are being downloaded (see Software management).</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/zh_CN/resizeFATChoose.xml b/docs/installer/zh_CN/resizeFATChoose.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7f187431
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/zh_CN/resizeFATChoose.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_CN" xml:id="resizeFATChoose">
+
+
+
+
+
+ <info>
+ <!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 31 -->
+<!--2013-12-01 re-adding this file to software/i18n/tools/docs/installer/en
+ in git, in case the related screen gets restored in drakx-installer-stage2-->
+<title xml:id="resizeFATChoose-ti1">Resize <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application>
+partition</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="resizeFATChoose-pa1">You have more than one
+<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> partition.
+Choose which one should be made smaller to make space for installing
+<application>Mageia</application>.</para>
+
+
+
+<!--<para revision="1" xml:id="resizeFATChoose-pa2">
+.......</para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="resizeFATChoose-pa3">........</para>-->
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/zh_CN/securityLevel.xml b/docs/installer/zh_CN/securityLevel.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b189128d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/zh_CN/securityLevel.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xml:id="securityLevel" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_CN">
+
+
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="securityLevel-ti1">安全级别</title>
+ </info>
+
+
+
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!-- 2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml" -->
+<!-- 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-securityLevel.png"
+align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="securityLevel-im1"></imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="securityLevel-pa1">You can adjust your security level here.</para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="securityLevel-pa2">Leave the default settings as they are, if you don't know what to choose.</para>
+
+ <para revision="2" xml:id="securityLevel-pa3">After install, it will always be possible to adjust your security settings
+in the <guilabel>Security</guilabel> part of the Mageia Control Center.</para>
+ </section>
+
diff --git a/docs/installer/zh_CN/selectCountry.xml b/docs/installer/zh_CN/selectCountry.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7c6494f2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/zh_CN/selectCountry.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xml:id="selectCountry" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_CN">
+
+
+
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="selectCountry-ti1">Select your Country / Region</title>
+ </info>
+
+
+
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!-- 2012-12-25 marja - moved this section out of misc-params -->
+<!-- 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-selectCountry.png"
+align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="selectCountry-im1"></imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+
+ <para revision="2" xml:id="selectCountry-pa1">Select your country or region. This is important for all kinds of settings,
+like the currency and wireless regulatory domain. Setting the wrong country
+can lead to not being able to use a Wireless network.</para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="selectCountry-pa2">If your country isn't in the list, click the <guilabel>Other
+Countries</guilabel> button and choose your country / region there.</para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="selectCountry-pa3">If your country is only in the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> list,
+after clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> it may seem a country from the
+first list was chosen. Please ignore this, DrakX will follow your real
+choice.</para>
+ </note>
+
+ <section xml:id="inputMethod">
+
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="inputMethod-ti7">Input method</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="selectCountry-pa4">In the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> screen you can also select an
+input method (at the bottom of the list). Input methods allow users to input
+multilingual characters (Chinese, Japanese, Korean, etc). IBus is the
+default input method in Mageia DVDs, Africa/India and Asia/no-India
+Live-CDs. For Asian and African locales, IBus will be set as default input
+method so users should not need to configure it manually. Other input
+methods(SCIM, GCIN, HIME, etc) also provide similar functions and can be
+installed if you added HTTP/FTP media before package selection.</para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="selectCountry-pa5">If you missed the input method setup during installation, you can access it
+after you boot your installed system via "Configure your Computer" -&gt;
+"System", or by running localedrake as root.</para>
+ </note>
+ </section>
+ </section>
+
diff --git a/docs/installer/zh_CN/selectInstallClass.xml b/docs/installer/zh_CN/selectInstallClass.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1bc56a99
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/zh_CN/selectInstallClass.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_CN" xml:id="selectInstallClass">
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ <info>
+ <!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 18 -->
+<!-- 20120405 updated JohnR -->
+<!-- enhanced xml code for screenshot, removed para xml:id's, changed "you'll" to
+ "you will" and "don't" to "do not" and a passive to an active tense, marja, 20120409-->
+<!-- barjac 2012-04-10 In the spirit of KISS reverted to my initial basic version -->
+<!-- 2013-05-05 marja, corrected typo in screenshot name, removed -->
+<title xml:id="selectInstallClass-ti1">新安装或升级</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-selectInstallClass.png" align="center"
+format="PNG"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>安装</para>
+
+ <para>Use this option for a fresh <application>Mageia</application> installation.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>升级</para>
+
+ <para>If you have one or more <application>Mageia</application> installations on
+your system, the installer will allow you to upgrade one of them to the
+latest release.</para>
+
+<warning>
+ <para>Only upgrading from a previous Mageia version that was <emphasis>still
+supported</emphasis> when this installer's version was released, has been
+thoroughly tested. If you want to upgrade a Mageia version that had already
+reached its End Of Life when this one was released, then it is better to do
+a clean install while preserving your <literal>/home</literal> partition.</para>
+</warning>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>If during install you decide to stop the installation, it is possible to
+reboot, but please think twice before you do this. Once a partition has been
+formatted or updates have started to be installed, your computer isn't in
+the same state anymore and rebooting it could very well leave you with an
+unusable system. If in spite of that you are very sure rebooting is what you
+want, go to a text terminal by pressing the three keys <guilabel>Alt Ctrl
+F2</guilabel> at the same time. After that, press <guilabel>Alt Ctrl
+Delete</guilabel> simultaneously to reboot.</para>
+ </note>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>If you have discovered that you forgot to select an additional language, you
+can return from the "Install or Upgrade" screen to the language choice
+screen by pressing <guilabel>Alt Ctrl Home</guilabel>. Do
+<emphasis>not</emphasis> do this later in the install.</para>
+ </tip>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/zh_CN/selectKeyboard.xml b/docs/installer/zh_CN/selectKeyboard.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2c46be0b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/zh_CN/selectKeyboard.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_CN" xml:id="selectKeyboard"
+ xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+
+
+
+
+ <info>
+ <!-- Started by marja on 2012 03 31 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<title xml:id="selectKeyboard-ti1">键盘</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa1">DrakX selects an appropriate keyboard for your language. If no suitable
+keyboard is found it will default to a US keyboard layout.</para>
+
+ <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-selectKeyboard.png" />
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa2">Make sure that the selection is correct or choose another keyboard
+layout. If you don't know which layout your keyboard has, look in the
+specifications that came with your system, or ask the computer vendor. There
+may even be a label on the keyboard that identifies the layout. You can also
+look here: <link
+xlink:href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout">en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout</link></para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa3">If your keyboard isn't in the list shown, click on
+<guibutton>More</guibutton> to get a full list, and select your keyboard
+there.</para>
+
+ <para revision="1"><warning>
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa5">After choosing a keyboard from the <guibutton>More</guibutton> dialog,
+you'll return to the first keyboard choice dialog and it will seem as though
+a keyboard from that screen was chosen. You can safely ignore this anomaly
+and continue the installation: Your keyboard is the one you chose from the
+full list.</para>
+ </warning></para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa4">If you choose a keyboard based on non-Latin characters, you will see an
+extra dialog screen asking how you would prefer to switch between the Latin
+and non-Latin keyboard layouts</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/zh_CN/selectKeyboardLive.xml b/docs/installer/zh_CN/selectKeyboardLive.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1190903e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/zh_CN/selectKeyboardLive.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_CN" xml:id="selectKeyboardLive">
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="selectKeyboardLive-ti1">Select keyboard</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="selectKeyboardLive-im1" revision="1"
+align="center" format="PNG" fileref="live-selectKeyboard.png"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para>You will be required to set the keyboard layout you wish to use in
+Mageia​​. The default one is selected according to your language and
+timezone previously selected.</para>
+</section> \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/zh_CN/selectLanguage.xml b/docs/installer/zh_CN/selectLanguage.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..64d105e9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/zh_CN/selectLanguage.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="selectLanguage" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_CN">
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ <info>
+ <!-- Made by marja on 2012 04 01, using barjac's text -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has had a look -->
+<!-- removed para id's, corrected duplicate id's for segments, corrected wrong
+ code in figure, marja, 20120409 -->
+<!-- barjac 2012-04-11 - removed image figure tag - and once again had to clean
+ up mess made of this header by xxe -->
+<title xml:id="selectLanguage-ti1">请选择要使用的语言。</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <para>Select your preferred language, by first expanding the list for your
+continent. <application>Mageia</application> will use this selection during
+the installation and for your installed system.</para>
+
+ <para condition="classical">If it is likely that you will require several languages installed on your
+system, for yourself or other users, then you should use the
+<guibutton>Multiple languages</guibutton> button to add them now. It will be
+difficult to add extra language support after installation.</para>
+
+ <mediaobject>
+<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center"
+fileref="dx2-selectLanguage.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject
+condition="live"> <imagedata fileref="live-language.png" format=""/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <warning condition="classical">
+ <para>Even if you choose more than one language, you must first choose one of them
+as your preferred language in the first language screen. It will also be
+marked as chosen in the multiple languages screen .</para>
+ </warning>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem condition="classical">
+ <para>If your keyboard language is not the same as your preferred language, then
+it is advisable to install the language of your keyboard as well.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Mageia uses UTF-8 (Unicode) support by default.</para>
+
+ <para condition="classical">This may be disabled in the "multiple languages" screen if you know that it
+is inappropriate for your language. Disabling UTF-8 applies to all installed
+languages.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>You can change the language of your system after installation in the Mageia
+Control Center -> System -> Manage localization for your system.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+</section> \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/zh_CN/selectMouse.xml b/docs/installer/zh_CN/selectMouse.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f9da01f6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/zh_CN/selectMouse.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="selectMouse" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_CN">
+
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="selectMouse-ti1">选择鼠标</title>
+ </info>
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ <mediaobject>
+<!-- Made by marja on 2012 04 11 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- adding some "real" text now that we know the page shows up in the right place-->
+<!-- marja 2012-04-24 adding screenshot -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-selectMouse.png" align="center"
+format="PNG" > </imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para revision="2" xml:id="selectMouse-pa1">If you are not happy with how your mouse responds, you can select a
+different one here.</para>
+
+ <para revision="2" xml:id="selectMouse-pa2">Usually, <guilabel>Universal</guilabel> - <guilabel>Any PS/2 and USB
+mice</guilabel> is a good choice.</para>
+
+ <para revision="2" xml:id="selectMouse-pa3">Select <guilabel>Universal</guilabel> - <guilabel>Force evdev</guilabel> to
+configure the buttons that do not work on a mouse with six or more buttons.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/zh_CN/setupBootloader.xml b/docs/installer/zh_CN/setupBootloader.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..39b9fd65
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/zh_CN/setupBootloader.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_CN" xml:id="setupBootloader">
+
+
+
+
+ <info>
+ <!---->
+<!--Lebarhon 2015 07 04 Project for Mageia 5. The UEFI and BIOS systems are so different I think it is better to split the page-->
+<title xml:id="setupBootloader-ti1">引导程序的主要选项</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" align="center"
+fileref="dx2-setupBootloader.png" xml:id="setupBootloader-im1"
+format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>With a Bios system</title>
+
+ <para xml:id="setupBootloader-pa1" revision="4">If you prefer different bootloader settings to those chosen automatically by
+the installer, you can change them here.</para>
+
+ <para xml:id="setupBootloader-pa2" revision="4">You may already have another operating system on your machine, in which case
+you need to decide whether to add Mageia to your existing bootloader, or
+allow Mageia to create a new one.</para>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>The Mageia graphical menus are nice :</para>
+ </tip>
+
+ <section xml:id="usingMageiaBootloader">
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="usingMageiaBootloader-ti2">Using a Mageia bootloader</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <para revision="3" xml:id="setupBootloader-pa4">By default, Mageia writes a new GRUB (legacy) bootloader into the MBR
+(Master Boot Record) of your first hard drive. If you already have other
+operating systems installed, Mageia attempts to add them to your new Mageia
+boot menu.</para>
+
+ <para revision="3">Mageia now also offers GRUB2 as an optional bootloader in addition to GRUB
+legacy and Lilo.</para>
+
+ <warning>
+ <para revision="3" xml:id="setupBootloader-pa6">Linux systems which use the GRUB2 bootloader are not currently supported by
+GRUB (legacy) and will not be recognized if the default GRUB bootloader is
+used.</para>
+
+ <para revision="3">The best solution here is to use the GRUB2 bootloader which is available at
+the Summary page during installation.</para>
+ </warning>
+ </section>
+
+ <section xml:id="usingExistingBootloader">
+ <info>
+ <title revision="2" xml:id="usingExistingBootloader-ti4">Using an existing bootloader</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <para revision="3" xml:id="setupBootloader-pa46">If you decide to use an existing bootloader then you will need to remember
+to STOP at the summary page during the installation and click the Bootloader
+<guibutton>Configure</guibutton> button, which will allow you to change the
+bootloader install location.</para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="setupBootloader-pa47">Do not select a device e.g."sda", or you will overwrite your existing
+MBR. You must select the root partition that you chose during the
+partitioning phase earlier, e.g. sda7.</para>
+
+ <para xml:id="setupBootloader-pa48" revision="1">To be clear, sda is a device, sda7 is a partition on that device.</para>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="setupBootloader-pa48a">Go to tty2 with Ctrl+Alt+F2 and type <literal>df</literal> to check where
+your <literal>/</literal> (root) partition is. Ctrl+Alt+F7 takes you back to
+the installer screen.</para>
+ </tip>
+
+ <para revision="2" xml:id="setupBootloader-pa49">The exact procedure for adding your Mageia system to an existing bootloader
+is beyond the scope of this help, however in most cases it will involve
+running the relevant bootloader installation program which should detect and
+add it automatically. See the documentation for the operating system in
+question.</para>
+ </section>
+
+ <section xml:id="advancedOptionBootloader">
+ <info>
+ <title revision="2" xml:id="advancedOptionBootloader-ti5">Bootloader advanced option</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <para revision="3" xml:id="setupBootloader-pa52">If you have very limited disk space for the <literal>/</literal> partition
+that contains <literal>/tmp</literal>, click on
+<guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> and check the box for <guilabel>Clean /tmp
+at each boot</guilabel>. This helps to maintain some free space.</para>
+ </section>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>With an UEFI system</title>
+
+ <para>With an UEFI system, the user interface is slightly different as you cannot
+choose the boot loader since only Grub2-efi is available. </para>
+
+ <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-setupBootloader2.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para>If Mageia is the first system installed on your computer, the installer
+created an ESP (EFI System Partition) to receive the bootloader
+(Grub2-efi). If there was already UEFI operating systems previously
+installed on your computer (Windows 8 for example), the Mageia installer
+detected the existing ESP created by Windows and added grub2-efi. Although
+it is possible to have several ESPs, only one is advised and enough whatever
+the number of operating systems you have.</para>
+
+ <para>Don't modify the "Boot Device" unless really knowing what you do.</para>
+ </section>
+</section> \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/zh_CN/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml b/docs/installer/zh_CN/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..6feccdc4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/zh_CN/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="setupBootloaderAddEntry" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_CN">
+
+
+ <info>
+ <!--Lebarhon 2015 07 04 Project for Mageia 5. The UEFI and BIOS systems are so different I think it is better to split the page-->
+<title xml:id="setupBootloaderAddEntry-ti1">Add or Modify a Boot Menu Entry</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1"
+fileref="dx2-bootloaderConfiguration.png" align="center" format="PNG"
+xml:id="bootloaderConfiguration-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>With a Bios system</title>
+
+ <para>You can add an entry or modify the one you select first, by pressing the
+relevant button in the <emphasis>Bootloader Configuration</emphasis> screen
+and editing the screen that pops up on top of it.</para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>If you have chosen <code>Grub 2</code> as your bootloader, you cannot use
+this tool to edit entries at this step, press 'Next'. You need to manually
+edit <code>/boot/grub2/custom.cfg</code> or use <code>grub-customizer</code>
+instead.</para>
+ </note>
+
+ <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="setupBootloaderAddEntry-im1"
+align="center" format="PNG" fileref="dx2-setupBootloaderAddEntry.png"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para>Some things that can be done without any risk, are changing the label of an
+entry and ticking the box to make an entry the default one.</para>
+
+ <para>You can add the proper version number of an entry, or rename it completely.</para>
+
+ <para>The default entry is the one the systems boots into if you don't make a
+choice while booting up.</para>
+
+ <warning>
+ <para>Editing other things can leave you with an unbootable system. Please don't
+just try something without knowing what you are doing.</para>
+ </warning>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>With an UEFI system</title>
+
+ <para>In this case you are using Grub2-efi and you cannot use this tool to edit
+entries at this step. To do that you need to manually edit
+<code>/boot/grub2/custom.cfg</code> or use <code>grub-customizer</code>
+instead. All you can do here, is to choose the default entry in the drop
+down list.</para>
+
+ <para>After a click on the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> button, another drop down
+list allows to choose the video resolution for Grub2 which is a graphical
+boot loader.</para>
+
+ <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-bootloaderConfiguration2.png"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+ </section>
+</section> \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/zh_CN/setupSCSI.xml b/docs/installer/zh_CN/setupSCSI.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b6bb7032
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/zh_CN/setupSCSI.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xml:id="setupSCSI" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_CN">
+
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="setupSCSI-ti1">设置SCSI</title>
+ </info>
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ <mediaobject>
+<!-- Made by marja on 2012 04 02 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- JohnR - edited 2012-03-03 -->
+<!-- SimonNZG has reviewed 2012-04-03 (changed editted to edited in JohnR's comment ;-) -->
+<!-- barjac has re-reviewed and made some minor tweaks. Revisions incremented. -->
+<!-- marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot -->
+<!-- marja 2012-04-25 replacing John's version 1.6 because that one was based on the
+ Mdv doc instead of on our setupSCSI file -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-setupSCSI.png"
+format="PNG" align="center" xml:id="setupSCSI-im1"></imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para revision="3.1" xml:id="setupSCSI-pa1">DrakX usually detects hard disks correctly. With some older SCSI controllers
+it may be unable to determine the correct drivers to use and subsequently
+fail to recognise the drive.</para>
+
+ <para revision="2" xml:id="setupSCSI-pa2">If this happens, you will need to manually tell Drakx which SCSI drive(s)
+you have.</para>
+
+ <para revision="3" xml:id="setupSCSI-pa3">DrakX should then be able to configure the drive(s) correctly.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/zh_CN/soundConfig.xml b/docs/installer/zh_CN/soundConfig.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..886f1d67
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/zh_CN/soundConfig.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xml:id="soundConfig" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_CN">
+
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="soundConfig-ti1">声音配置</title>
+ </info>
+
+
+
+ <mediaobject>
+<!-- Started by marja on 2013-12-07 -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-soundConfig.png" revision="1"
+format="PNG" xml:id="soundConfig-im1" /> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para>In this screen the name of the driver that the installer chose for your
+sound card is given, which will be the default driver if we have a default
+one.
+ </para>
+ <para>The default driver should work without problems. However, if after install
+you do encounter problems, then run <command>draksound</command> or start
+this tool via MCC (Mageia Control Center), by choosing the
+<guilabel>Hardware</guilabel> tab and clicking on <guilabel>Sound
+Configuration</guilabel> at the top right of the screen.
+ </para>
+ <para>Then, in the draksound or "Sound Configuration" tool screen, click on
+<guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> and then on
+<guibutton>Troubleshooting</guibutton> to find very useful advice about how
+to solve the problem.
+ </para>
+
+ <section xml:id="soundConfig-Advanced">
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="soundConfig-Advanced-ti1">高级</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <para>Clicking <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> in this screen, during install, is
+useful if there is no default driver and there are several drivers
+available, but you think the installer selected the wrong one.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>In that case you can select a different driver after clicking on
+<guibutton>Let me pick any driver</guibutton>.
+ </para>
+
+ </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/zh_CN/takeOverHdConfirm.xml b/docs/installer/zh_CN/takeOverHdConfirm.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c4ba60ac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/zh_CN/takeOverHdConfirm.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_CN" xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm">
+
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm-ti1">Confirm hard disk to be formatted</title>
+ </info>
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ <mediaobject>
+<!-- Made by marja on 2012 04 03 -->
+<!-- test comment - johnr -->
+<!-- 2012-04-24 marja - replaced "if you are not sure you selected the correct
+ hard disk." with "if you are not sure about your choice", because I'm sure I
+ saw this help screen when I had only one HD -->
+<!-- 2013-05-05 marja added screenshot -->
+<imageobject condition='live'> <imagedata
+fileref="live-takeOverHdConfirm.png" format="PNG" align="center"
+></imagedata> </imageobject> <imageobject condition='classical'> <imagedata
+fileref="dx2-takeOverHdConfirm.png" format="PNG" align="center"
+></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm-pa1">Click on <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> if you are not sure about your
+choice.</para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm-pa2">Click on <guibutton>Next</guibutton> if you are sure and want to erase every
+partition, every operating system and all data on that hard disk.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/zh_CN/testing.xml b/docs/installer/zh_CN/testing.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0e70db21
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/zh_CN/testing.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_CN" xml:id="testing" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="testing-ti1">Testing Mageia as Live system</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <section xml:id="testing-1">
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="testing1-ti1">Live mode</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="live-liveMode.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para>You get this screen if you selected "Boot Mageia". If not, you get the
+"<link linkend="doPartitionDisks">Partitioning</link> step"</para>
+
+ <section>
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="testing2-ti1">Testing hardware</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <para>One of the Live mode goals is to test if the hardware is correctly managed
+by Mageia. You can check if all devices have a driver in the Hardware
+section of the Mageia Control Center. You can test the most current devices:</para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>network interface: configure it with net_applet</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>graphical card: if you see the previous screen, it's already OK.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>webcam:</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>sound: a jingle has already been played</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>printer: configure it and print a test page</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>scanner: scan a document from ...</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>If all is OK for you, you can process to the installation. If not, you can
+leave with the quit button.</para>
+
+ <remark>The configuration settings you made here are kept for the installation.</remark>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="testing3-ti1">Launch installation</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="live-liveMode-install.png"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para>To launch the installation of Mageia LiveCD or Live DVD to the hard disc or
+SSD drive, simply click on the icon "Install on Hard Disk". You will get
+this screen, and then the "<link
+linkend="doPartitionDisks">Partitioning</link> step" as for the direct
+installation.</para>
+ </section>
+ </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/zh_CN/uninstall-Mageia.xml b/docs/installer/zh_CN/uninstall-Mageia.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..4b19964e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/zh_CN/uninstall-Mageia.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_CN" xml:id="uninstall-Mageia">
+ <!--Lebarhon 2015-07-06 Not true with UEFI -->
+<info>
+ <title xml:id="uninstall-Mageia-ti1">正在卸载Mageia</title>
+ </info>
+
+
+
+ <section>
+ <title xml:id="uninstall-Mageia-ti2">Howto</title>
+
+ <para>If Mageia didn't convince you or you can't install it correctly, in short
+you want get rid of it. That is your right and Mageia also gives you the
+possibility to uninstall. This is not true for every operating system.</para>
+
+ <para>After your data backup, reboot your installation Mageia DVD and select
+Rescue system, then, Restore Windows boot loader. At the next boot, you will
+only have Windows with no option to choose your operating system.</para>
+
+ <para>To recover the space used by Mageia partitions on Windows, click on
+<code>Start -> Control Panel -> Administrative Tools -> Computer Management
+-> Storage -> Disk Management</code> to access to the partition
+management. You will recognize the Mageia partition because they are labeled
+<guilabel>Unknown</guilabel>, and also by their size and place in the
+disk. Right click on each of these partitions and select
+<guibutton>Delete</guibutton>. The space will be freed.</para>
+
+ <para>If you are using Windows XP, you can create a new partition and format it
+(FAT32 or NTFS). It will get a partition letter.</para>
+
+ <para>If you have Vista or 7, you have one more possibility, you can extend the
+existing partition that is at the left of the freed space. There are other
+partitioning tools that can be used, such as gparted, available for both
+windows and linux. As always, when changing partitions, be very careful, and
+make sure all important things have been backed up.</para>
+ </section>
+</section> \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/zh_CN/unused.xml b/docs/installer/zh_CN/unused.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..17d25e2a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/zh_CN/unused.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_CN" xml:id="unused" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+ <info>
+ <title xml:id="unused-ti1">Keep or delete unused material</title>
+ </info>
+
+ <mediaobject condition="live">
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="live-unused.png"
+format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="unused-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para>In this step, the installer looks for unused locales packages and unused
+hardware packages. Then it proposes you to delete them. It is a good idea to
+accept, except if you prepare an installation which has to run on different
+hardware.</para>
+
+ <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="live-unused-InstallationProgress.png"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+ <para>The next step is the copying of files on hard disk. This takes some
+minutes. At the end, you get a blank screen for some time, it's normal.</para>
+</section>